JP7146320B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

It relates to a pachinko game machine.

Pachinko machines, which are currently the most popular, are called "special symbols" (or main game symbols) on the display part such as 7 segments when a game ball enters the start chucker. When the symbol is displayed variably, and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state in which the player is more profitable than in the normal game state {large winning port that is normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called "first-class pachinko game machine") that shifts to a game in which a player (so-called attacker) releases the game under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The pattern to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special pattern. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner.

Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise how to make the overall performance including the fluctuation mode of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method.

JP 2014-014494 JP 2014-014576 JP 2014-039745 JP 2014-079281

However, since such production methods have been used frequently, there is a problem that further improvement is required for the control method in order to improve the entertainment.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied; ,
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition related to a certain first reservation is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and based on the result of the right or wrong judgment, the first a first game content determining means for determining a stationary display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
First identification information display control means for controlling to stop display of the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information on the first identification information display section in accordance with determination by the first game content determination means. When,
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for, when the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, temporarily storing the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied; ,
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition related to a certain second reservation is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a stationary display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information;
Second identification information display control means for controlling so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means. When,
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped displayed, or after the winning judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player after the game is played;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variably displayed by the effect display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the second performance symbols on the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit. ,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first design for effect and the design for the second effect are changed. It is configured so that it can be displayed,
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first production pattern corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute variable display of production patterns,
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first production pattern corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second display corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute variable display of production patterns,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the final display mode corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the two production patterns,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the final display mode corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the two production patterns,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one presentation period,
With respect to the first effect symbols variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display mode can be displayed. When the display mode is displayed, it is possible to execute re-variation to be displayed in a variable manner again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the second It is configured so that a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the design for one effect can be displayed,
With respect to the second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain effect period,
In a predetermined situation before the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, a specific first performance symbol among a plurality of first performance symbol rows Said first effect symbol associated with a predetermined first effect symbol row different from said specific first effect symbol row out of said plurality of said first effect symbol rows than said first effect symbol row associated with said row While it is configured to be superimposed and displayed so that the front side is the front side, it is before the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period. In a specific situation after the predetermined situation, the first effect symbol related to the specific first effect symbol row is higher than the first effect symbol row related to the predetermined first effect symbol row While it is configured to be superimposed and displayed so that the front side is the front side, even in the predetermined situation or in the specific situation, the above-mentioned The second production pattern is configured so that it is not displayed overlapping each other,
It has a plurality of types of development effects which are effects to be executed after establishing a ready-to-win state, and has a plurality of types of after-reach effects that can occur after establishment of the ready-to-win state and before execution of the development effect,
The probability of displaying the specific display mode after the occurrence of the post-reach effect is configured to differ according to which of the plurality of types of the post-reach effect has occurred,
When the first effect pattern is displayed in the final display mode, an effect can be generated around the first effect pattern, while the second effect pattern is displayed in the final display mode. When it is done, it is configured so that the effect does not occur around the second production pattern,
When the final display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, the final display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed in each of the plurality of the first effect pattern rows, so that the plurality of the It is configured to display a combination of final display modes of the first performance symbols consisting of the first performance symbols,
When the final display mode of the second effect pattern is displayed, by displaying the final display mode of the second effect pattern in each of the plurality of the second effect pattern rows, the plurality of the It is configured to display a combination of final display modes of the second effect pattern consisting of the second effect pattern,
The plurality of first effect pattern rows and the plurality of second effect symbol rows are the same number of symbol rows,
The display mode of the second effect symbol immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. However, the display mode of the second effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display Regardless of the final display mode, after displaying a specific type of specified display mode among a plurality of types of specified display modes that are predetermined multiple types of display modes, a predetermined type different from the specified type of specified display mode It is configured to be switched to the specified display mode of
The number of types of the plurality of types of prescribed display modes is configured to be less than the number of types of final display modes of the first effect pattern,
The specific type of first effect symbol is configured to be able to be displayed with a special element indicating that it is highly advantageous to the player in a specific situation,
The first production pattern of a type different from the specific type of the first production pattern is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation,
Even if the second effect pattern is the same type as the first effect pattern of the specific type, the specific type of the first effect pattern is different from the specific type of the second effect pattern. Even if the second production pattern is of the same type as the first production pattern, it is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation,
The combination of the final display mode of the first design for effect and the combination of the final display mode of the second design for effect are, when the RAM clear process is executed, the first display mode before the RAM clear process is executed. Regardless of the display mode of the combination of the final display mode of the design for effect and the combination of the final display mode of the second design for effect, it is configured to be displayed in a predetermined display mode,
Having at least a specific display mode as the predetermined display mode related to the combination of the final display modes of the first effect symbols,
The first effect pattern is configured to be displayed in combination with a specific display element and a predetermined display element,
The specific display element in one of the plurality of first effect symbols constituting the specific display mode when the RAM clearing process is executed is defined as the first display element, and the RAM The specific display element in a given first effect symbol among the plurality of first effect symbols constituting the combination of the final display modes of the first effect symbols before the execution of the clear process is the second display element. When there are two display elements and the first display element and the second display element are the same type of the specific display element, the plurality of the display elements constituting the specific display mode when the RAM clear process is executed Said predetermined display element to be combined with said first display element in said first effect pattern among said first effect symbols, and final display of said first effect pattern before RAM clear processing is executed. The predetermined display element combined with the second display element in a certain first effect pattern among the plurality of first effect patterns constituting the combination of modes can be of different types. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by
<Appendix>
Other aspects different from this aspect will be listed below, but the present invention can be implemented without being limited to these.
The pachinko machine according to this alternative aspect is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to improve the image display control method corresponding to the game situation.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of decoration symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of second decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart for determining a drawing stop symbol on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a display mode image diagram of decorative symbols on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram relating to the configuration of an effect display device in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an image diagram of executing a transparent effect in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flow chart of the second main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flow chart of prefetch suspension content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol reserve content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flow chart of the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flow chart of decorative design display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flow chart of the first main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flow chart of the second main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending display mode change control process on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a hold change image diagram in a specific advance notice effect on the sub-main control unit side in a pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of pending digestion transmission image display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram of pending digestion transmission image change on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flow chart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display control processing during time saving on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flow chart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to decorative symbols to be used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to the stop display mode of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of display priorities in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in hold display in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each game state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to erasure of the pending display in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a working diagram of the sorting member unit of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display mode in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of pending change display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a pending occurrence display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a pending digestion display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a holding passage route image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flow chart of second main game win time look-ahead determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative symbol effect content determination table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flow chart of prefetching display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of second decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of a stop symbol display at the time of a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an image diagram of executing an interrupt effect in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of decoration design content determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during variable standby in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the transition of update of pending display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the final display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the hitting warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed during the look-ahead effect display and the probability that pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed during trigger variation, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-off (not RAM clear) and decorative symbols after power-off recovery in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between power off (RAM clear) and decorative symbols after power off and recovery in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability of displaying pseudo-continuous symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a full-rotation effect in a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a variation mode of decorative symbols for each stage in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing display contents of decorative symbols during variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design when re-fluctuation is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when specific symbols are displayed and a super ready-to-win effect is produced in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in which an advanced symbol is displayed corresponding to the advance notice type and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is produced when different display modes of the same notice type are performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing display transition when developing to the same super ready-to-win effect via different displays in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into a super ready-to-win effect via a button effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing display transitions when a super ready-to-win effect occurs in different effect stages in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing display transition when re-fluctuation is executed in a different production stage in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the variation speed of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

form for implementation

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering ball" includes not only prize winning in which a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. Easy state. Also, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as a retracted state) ) (so-called tongue-type attacker), advance state=easy-win state, retreat state=non-easy-win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine game content in pachinko machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "random number (random number for lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification pattern are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., but at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bunch of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). "Game state" means, for example, a special game state in which a large winning hole can be opened, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-probability variable game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high lottery probability, shift to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize to the starting port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal pattern time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In some cases, it is an arbitrary combination of one or more of the following: long open period of variable members, high winning probability of open variable members, short notification time of lottery results for open variable members, and the like. "Variable display stop time" means the time to hold the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. After the lapse of time, the change related to the remaining suspension is started (the change start condition and the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition are satisfied). The “drawing pattern” is a display image of a type called a decorative pattern or a decorative pattern, and is typically an image object such as a card on which numbers, symbols, and the like are written. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the activated line with a combination of the same numbers and symbols, it is notified that a big win has occurred. The ``first design for performance'' and the ``second design for performance'' are both ``designs for performance'', but each of them is configured to independently report the occurrence of a big win. corresponds to (for example, the "first design for effect" is "777" and it is possible to notify the occurrence of a big hit, and the "second design for effect" is "777" and it is possible to notify the occurrence of a big hit. also). "Variation mode" means, for example, variation time (variation time for special symbols, variation time for production symbols, and variation time for normal symbols), scroll display of decorative symbols, decorative symbols on the spot Rotating (these are sometimes referred to as "switching display modes") and the like. ``Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / not to stop the production pattern'' is synonymous with ``temporarily stopping → re-fluctuation'' as one set, and performing/not performing this one set. be. "Re-fluctuation" means a situation such as "temporarily stop the production pattern → re-fluctuation", a situation such as "start fluctuation → temporarily stop the production pattern", or "start re-variation → production pattern". Temporarily stop (temporary stop after the second time)”, and pseudo-variation in pseudo-continuous production and revival fluctuation in revival production (temporarily stop the production pattern with a losing pattern) After that, the winning pattern is displayed and stopped). It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, it is definitely stop-displayed together with the stop-display of the so-called special symbol) to notify the occurrence or absence of a big hit. In addition, the "drawing pattern" is based on the first element (e.g., numbers), and the second element (e.g., color) and third element (presence/content of incidental information such as characters and "SUPER") etc. It may be configured incidentally. Further, the "drawing pattern" may be configured such that the second element and/or the third element are different when the effect modes are different, even if the first element is the same. In addition, due to the difference in the second element and / or the third element, the degree of expectation that the reach variation will be a big hit, and the expectation that the symbol variation related to the look-ahead effect will be a big hit when a specific symbol combination is stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect Each time, the profit rate for the player, such as the number of rounds at the time of winning the big win and the game state after the end of the big win, may be different. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in the case of the probability variable gaming state, the time shortening gaming state, etc., compared to the case of the normal gaming state, the second element and / or the third element may be configured to be an advantageous element for In addition, the "information display unit" is for displaying information including an advance notice effect, etc., and is, for example, a effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown. In addition, the "effect display section" is for displaying effects including advance notice effects, etc., and includes, for example, effect display devices, 7-segment LEDs, LED lamps, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

Prior to a detailed description of the present invention, a brief configuration according to the present invention will now be described.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, two types of decorative patterns, a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed or the second decoration is performed in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern. A configuration for displaying (variable display) patterns will be described in detail in (this embodiment).

Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (this embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row during the execution of pseudo continuous variation, special symbols and specific numbers (numbers only) (Modification 1 from the present embodiment) will be described in detail.

Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (this embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, the more the temporary stop timing is in the latter half {or the pseudo continuous number within the variation (Modification 2 from this embodiment) will be described in detail.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, the display area SG10 of the performance display device SG is configured to be able to execute a transparent performance in which the characters in the performance display device SG become visible, and the transparent performance is being executed. (Modification 3 from the present embodiment) will be described in detail with respect to the configuration in which the effect display is executed in the second decorative design display device even when the first decorative design is hidden.

The pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern as decorative patterns, and is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect, and the special pattern is a final variation (trigger suspension) of the look-ahead effect. (Second Embodiment) will be described in detail.

Of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), when executing the holding change effect (production in which the holding display mode changes) based on winning the prefetch lottery, change to a specific holding display mode (Modification 1 from the second embodiment) will be described in detail.

Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), the appearance rate of special symbols (forecast lottery winning rate and angel zone) due to fluctuations on the first main game side and fluctuations on the second main game side (Modification example 2 from the second embodiment) will be described in detail.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, in the time-reduced game state, the time for one variation of the first decorative symbol can be a time value for multiple variations of the second decorative symbol (or the main game symbol). This configuration will be described in detail in (third embodiment).

Various configurations related to the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, which are applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described in detail in (Fourth Embodiment). explain.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which the display corresponding to the two suspensions of the first suspension display and the second suspension display is displayed on the effect display device (Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment ) will be described in detail.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, parallel lottery can be executed, the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation of the first main game patterns are the first decorative patterns, and the decorative patterns corresponding to the fluctuations of the second main game patterns are the second. (Fifth embodiment) will be described in detail the configuration of the two decorative patterns.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the configuration obtained by changing the configuration related to the area where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed from the configuration of (fifth embodiment) (change from fifth embodiment) Example 1) explains in detail.

A configuration applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(this embodiment)

Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIG. 1, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A pachinko machine mainly consists of a machine frame and a game board. These will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22 and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray D22, and the like. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the game machine, and output sound effects according to the game state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, First big prize gate C10, second big prize gate C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out port D36 is installed. Each element will be described in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting port A10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start opening detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information.

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s and a second main game start electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. Next, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d changes between a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter the second main game starter B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and due to the presence of the first main game starter A10, the second main game starter The upper part of the game start port B10 is blocked. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10 And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game start port B10, but it is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game start port A10. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starter is arranged. A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be arranged apart from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to cover the upper portion of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. In addition, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. A game ball flowing down the right side (with reference to the center of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10 while being less likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10. It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starter H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easily guided. It is configured so as not to be easily guided {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game start openings H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out-port D36, the first big prize-winning port C10 and the second big prize-winning port C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. This is a prize winning port corresponding to the main game, which is located above the out port D36 and below the second big winning port C20. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening and a solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. to generate The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins (the first 1. Excite the big winning opening solenoid C13 to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called It may be a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 is a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game pattern (special pattern) or the second main game pattern (special pattern) stops with a big win pattern, and is out. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is positioned above the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening and a solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate A game ball entered into the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d changes the second big winning hole C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called It may be a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a role in production and the decorative symbol of the first main game side (decorative symbol of the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG, which will be described later.

Next, the performance display device SG executes the display of performance images including decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) that fluctuate and stop interlocking with the first main game symbols and second main game symbols. It is a device that Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first pending display portion SG12 (and a second pending display portion SG13) that displays main game pending information, and, for example, a plurality of lines of decorative symbols imitating a slot machine game (first decoration and a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying moving images of patterns and second decorative patterns). In this embodiment, the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first suspension display portion SG12 (and the second suspension display portion SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the suspension lamps of the main game symbols.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol variations pending (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game a main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and an effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content. SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes performance display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to winning in each prize opening are placed on the upper ball tray D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a payout unit KE10 etc. to be put out, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and game balls (stored balls) in the upper ball tray D20 are played. A launching device D42 that shoots one ball at a time to an area D30, a launching control board D40 that controls the shooting operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and a power supply for the pachinko game machine. A power switch Ea, which is an on/off switch, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (opposite side to the game side).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) based on the information (signal, command, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M , sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (In this example, the sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS are one board ) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S performs various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stoppage of the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , a sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display, stop display, pending display, notice display, etc. of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) on the effect display device SG. It comprises two controls of a sub-sub-control SS for execution. In addition, the main control board M, prize ball payout control board KH, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for pre-storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. Equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Here, although not shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area in order to prevent a modified program or the like from being written by fraud. It is preferable (eg, filling unused areas with all 0's, writing used areas down to younger addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data referenced by game machines with different specifications, or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide data such as data for Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to use the area at a lower address so as not to provide an unused program area. Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, the second 1 large winning entrance winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning winning winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (although not shown, a general winning entrance is an entrance that has prize balls but does not carry out a symbol lottery. )}, drive solenoids (not shown above, first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., input and output essential for progress of the game It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the game progress. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress and the like. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). It is configured to be able to output game-related information from to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device operable by the player that accepts a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits. In addition, although not shown, in this embodiment, a control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (shooting handle, launching motor, ball feeding device etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), etc., a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects for effects, as described above. It is connected to a drive (not shown). In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. Lighting control of the illumination lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. is configured to In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game peripheral H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production, and a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the main control board M, and are connected so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE having a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It consists of elements such as a ROM and a RAM used for processing, a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. Incidentally, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. FIG. The details of each means (apparatus) will be described below.

First, the main control board M comprises game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and progress of the game such as a special game or a specific game. and the game progress means MP that controls the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability fluctuation game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to the auxiliary game (easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbols and variation mode information related to main game symbols and auxiliary game symbols, on/off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ], etc., and various game information (for example, stop pattern information, stop pattern attribute information {for example, 16R big win, 8R big win, 4R big win, loss} on the game peripheral device side. , Information on variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal/state information/end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer for accumulating unsent commands MT10) and prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the winning of game balls into various prize winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ includes a ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entrance (starting opening, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and determines the result of the determination. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entered into each starting hole during variable display as holding balls within the upper limit number. is doing. In addition, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening and closing of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10, and the display control means MP10 for controlling the variation and stop display of each pattern. A second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main Regarding the game, the second main game and the auxiliary game, it has a specific game control means MP50 for determining to which game state the current game state is to be shifted, and for performing processing for shifting the game state based on the decision. is doing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start opening A10, and a second main game start opening. A second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game start opening for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start opening H10. A ball entry determining means MJ11-H, a first big winning hole entering ball determining means MJ11-C10 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10, and a second big winning hole C20 It has a second big winning hole entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number according to the determination result (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires game pattern determination random numbers, etc.), and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to acquire the auxiliary game side selection random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result and random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the "random number" in the claims and this specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or " A value randomly selected from a predetermined range of 0 to 255. Moreover, the random numbers may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of expressing values in order along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed (initial value ) is determined by an accidental value (initial value update method), a combination of these methods, and the like. Obtaining random numbers in this way makes it possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating random numbers, it is preferable to generate new random numbers without using the random numbers used in the previous lottery.

Next, the holding control means MJ30 controls the holding digestion control means MJ31 that controls the processing related to holding digestion and fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission is not granted. A first main game symbol reservation means MJ32 for determining whether or not to temporarily store the random number in the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the permission for symbol variation is obtained based on the determination result. - A, in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained, and based on the determination result, symbol variation permission is granted for the random number. Second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32-B, and auxiliary game side random numbers obtained in the situation where auxiliary game pattern fluctuation permission is not granted are temporarily stored. Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for judging whether or not to store, and holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted based on the judgment result. have.

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H combine the random numbers, which can store up to four, with the reservation order. 1st main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, 2nd main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of have.

Next, the game content determining means MN includes a lottery lottery means MN10 for determining whether the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game starter electric accessory B11d can be opened. special game transition determining means MN20 (for example, turning on the winning flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number and a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on. Here, the success/failure lottery means MN10 consist of a first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbols, and a second main game success/failure lottery means that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the second main game symbols. It has MN11-B and an auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success/failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the first main game symbols. a first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the second main game symbols, and a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Each has an auxiliary game success or failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the win/loss lottery based on the main game random numbers, the win/fail lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same value as any of all the winning random number values, or determines whether or not the winning random number value is When part or all of the random numbers are continuous numbers, the winning/failure judgment is executed by judging whether or not the main game random number is equal to or less than the upper limit of the winning random number and equal to or more than the lower limit. . Accurate determination processing can be performed by executing such a right/wrong determination. Conversely, if the success/fail judgment is performed by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or comparing only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, if the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) as a random value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of flowing current to the main control board M, and all the bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a danger of being lost. In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. }.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining a stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), A second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number) obtained, and an auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and an auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbols of the MN41-H.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining stop symbols related to the first main game symbols, The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → lottery table for first main game probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining stop symbols related to the second main game symbols. The lottery table MN41ta-B for determining the second main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variation game → lottery table for second main game probability variation game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbols, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game → normal auxiliary game lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 is the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbols based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, a second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game pattern based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal lottery table for game state, probability variable game → first main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbols. , The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game status lottery table, probability variable game→second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game→second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game pattern, and the auxiliary game variation mode The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game→auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the 1st main game symbol, and on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the auxiliary game symbol for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display after varying the game symbols.

Here, the first/second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a first/second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes a timer MP11t-H for managing auxiliary game symbol variations capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B is used to determine whether or not the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starter electric accessory B11d are satisfied. The second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the driving (opening) time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 includes a condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition conditions are satisfied. (Specifically, a special game content determination means MP32 that determines the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big winning Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and a special game time management means MP34 for opening and closing the opening and closing times of the C10 and the second big winning hole C20. Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes the first and second big winning opening electric role opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first big winning opening electric role C11d and the second big winning opening electric role C21d. , and a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. In addition, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 includes probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variable game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of times of time saving. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variable game in which the lottery probability to the special game is higher than in the normal game, or a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game pattern is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Point.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game pattern and the number of fluctuations of the second main game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (a probability fluctuation game without time reduction number limit except for). That is, the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted each time the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern change (stop). In addition, the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the time reduction game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) with a predetermined probability every time the pattern changes. (in the case of a pachinko game machine having a so-called falling lottery function). It should be noted that the time-reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time-reduction flag is on, or that the auxiliary game time-reduction flag is on, that is, the time-reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is operating, or the non-time shortening game state may indicate that the open time extension function is not operating. It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbols to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbols to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, ON/OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of times of time saving, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stop the currently varying first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

In addition, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game pattern information for temporarily storing information such as stop patterns related to currently fluctuating auxiliary game patterns (auxiliary game patterns in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are the first main game peripheral device A, which is the peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is the peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are the decorative patterns (the first decorative patterns and the second decorative It relates to the display of only information that does not affect the outcome of the game, including variations in symbols). These peripheral devices will be described in order below.

First, the first main game peripheral device A consists of a first main game starting port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that is capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that is capable of displaying the second main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. and have

Next, the shared peripheral device C for the first and second main games is in the closed state during the normal game, and in the special game (big win), the first big winning port C10 is opened under predetermined conditions. and a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H is the auxiliary game start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing of effect contents related to the effect display, and display control processing. and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. Each of the above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing pattern information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that governs the variation mode of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the determination process of the stop symbol, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol display control means SM21. 1 decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) reserved number management and reserved display processing; background effect display control means SM23 responsible for background image determination processing and display control processing; It has an advance notice effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and a ready-to-win effect display control means SM25 that controls reach effect content determination processing and display control processing.

Here, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative design (in this embodiment, two types of decorative design (hereinafter referred to as the first decorative design, the second decorative design The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are independent from each other, and the game is played by combining three number patterns of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. The result can be notified} and the design display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode, and various information (variation mode design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing information, stop design information, various flags, etc.); and a drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the design display content determination means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the content of design variation referred to when determining the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) effect content, display update timing, display update content are determined (or set) decorations that are referred to It further has a symbol effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed and controlled independently by the performance display control means (sub-main control section) SM based on information from the main control board M side. By making good use of these two types of decoration patterns, the game is constructed so as to increase the interest in the performance and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game, but this point will be described later. do.

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the reservation related to the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design). .

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determination means SM23n for determining the display contents of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display. and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display control means SM24 includes the notice effect display content determination means SM24n for determining the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, and the information relating to the notice effect display. and a temporary storage means SM24b for information related to the advance notice effect for temporarily storing the.

Next, the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, the ready-to-win effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the ready-to-win effect, and information related to the ready-to-win effect display. and a ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-main control unit SM, and image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. and a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further has an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information relating to various image displays.

The performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to a performance display device SG that displays an image related to the performance based on information from the performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative design display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative designs (first decorative design and second decorative design), and a first suspension display area SG12 (and second display area) for displaying main game suspension information. 2 pending display unit SG13).

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control. means controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. It should be noted that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of the flow of general processing in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly consists of processing steps (indicated by rectangles), judgments (indicated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (indicated by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. . Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in a separate flowchart, those referring to the separate flowchart are shown as subroutines (indicated by rectangles with double lines on the left and right sides). . Here, in the development stage of a game machine, game machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (subroutines that are not normally used) are configured not to be left behind, thereby preventing execution of processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraud.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally carried out by the manager of the game arcade or the like. In the case of Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, the information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, at step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the contents stored in the RAM area). compare with the amount of information available). Next, at step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M will store (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M. An information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at that timing, or the command may be set at that timing and a control command (to be described later) may be sent). may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately 1.5 ms intervals) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) is permitted {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing arrives, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value that causes a special game to be executed (immediately after the start of program processing, noise or fraudulent to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining the execution of the special game is executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, hardware interrupt at approximately 1.5 ms intervals), at step 1100, the main control board M executes auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process which will be described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize winning opening into which the game ball has entered. The payout control board KH is caused to execute and the processing for managing the results, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the processing that was in progress. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received by the sub-main control unit SM is important (for example, by receiving another command after receiving a certain command, the process is normally executed). Therefore, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M side decided to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands were set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the game machine is powered off, the process of FIG. be done. That is, at step 1020, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at NMI interrupt), the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, at step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start opening H10 (inflow, passage in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information indicating how many balls are reserved. is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Incidentally, even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flow chart of the electric accessary product driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessary product open flag is off. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and sets the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Along with acquiring, referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, the stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the holding ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H updates the reservation information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the relevant reservation ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has been reached. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B, based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), the second main game A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game short time flag is off seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and at the opening time of the electric accessory It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and the auxiliary game state temporary The electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238; if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224; (Processing of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-A detects first main game start entrance ball information from the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1304, at step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random numbers, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for doing are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, at step 1310, the suspension control means MJ30 sends the command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (first main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1312 also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304 .

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B detects the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. Determine whether information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1314, at step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers are obtained as in the case of the first main game content determination means: win/fail lottery random number, symbol lottery random number, and variation mode lottery random number. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number for the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range for each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, at step 1320, the suspension control means MJ30 sends information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (second main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). It should be noted that even if No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, as the information to be transmitted to the sub-main control section SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted. The pending number may be sent together, and these pieces of information can be used as information indicating that the random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the pending digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not there is a pending second main game symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1401, at step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No at step 1401, at step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game pattern, regardless of the presence of a reserved ball of the first main game pattern (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game pattern). Although it is configured to preferentially execute the pending digestion of the second main game symbol, it is not limited to this (pending digestion based on the winning order, and simultaneous parallel execution of both main game symbols It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws lots).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the pending digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not fluctuating, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition may be configured so as not to satisfy

If Yes at step 1403, at steps 1405 and 1406, the pending digestion control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). While reading the temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game Deletion from the design reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and shifting the remaining information temporarily stored (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success/failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, A main game pattern winning lottery is executed based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the probability varying gaming state is higher than that in the non-probability varying gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all. Also, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small win) that cannot change the game state is not exemplified, but it may be configured so that a small win occurs (a small win is won). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, for example, (1) the probability of winning a small win is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is better than the second main game side. (2) If a small win is won, the game state after the end of the small win is the same as the game state before the start of the small win. (If a big win is won, the game state after the end of the big win may be different from the game state before the start of the big win.) (3) Big wins are on the first main game side and the second main game side. The probability of winning is the same between and, and the probability of winning increases due to the state of the probability variable game, whereas the probability of winning is different between the first main game side and the second main game side for the small win. and the winning probability is not changed by entering the probability fluctuation gaming state. ★ such as "2 ★ 2" and "3 ★ 9" correspond to "special symbols") can be stopped, (5) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation that won the small hit, three of the same symbol Specific numbers that are combinations of numbers that are not uniform and have a certain regularity (for example, order such as "234", reverse order such as "432", odd number order such as "357" etc.) can be stopped, (6) a big win (2R or more, the number of rounds is different) that is the same (or similar) opening mode (visibility) of the big winning opening as seen from the player When viewed from the player's point of view, it looks like a similar opening mode (a small win is only one round, and the big win opening is opened multiple times in that one round, and the big win is opened multiple times the same number of times as the multiple times). (executed within the round)} (in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small win or a big win), ( 8) In the second decorative pattern, the "special pattern" dedicated to the small win does not stop (or sometimes does not stop); is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether it is a small win or a big win depends on the type of combination of decorative patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish. If the stop symbols include decorative symbols that make it almost certain that the game will shift to the variable gaming state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than if they are not included.

Next, at step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbols are related based on the main game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates ("4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B" in this example) are selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbols is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. In addition, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples and are not limited to these {for example, the lost symbols are not limited to one type of symbol, and may be configured to provide multiple types of symbols. Alternatively, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of variation and/or selection rate of the main game pattern is different from before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). may be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the main game pattern win-or-fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially the variation A variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the lottery result of the main game pattern, the main game time saving flag state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, It is configured to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols. That is, when the winning lottery result of the main game pattern is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time saving flag is on (time saving game state) A variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined, and when the number of reservations is 2 to 3, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short compared to when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 is easily determined (only when losing). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. Also, it may be configured so that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time shortening flag is ON) is relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side is configured to be advantageous to the player, the pattern fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, and the second main game side is likely to be suspended (which is advantageous to the player). (because it is intended to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the first main game side start opening and the second main game side start opening cannot be separated). It should be noted that an example of the effect executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in the "effect mode executed on the sub side". In addition, as an effect mode executed on the sub-side, a pseudo-continuous variation (effect in which multiple symbol variations appear to occur during one time variation display of the main game symbols), which will be described later, is performed. After prompting the player whether or not, a "pseudo continuous failure effect" that notifies that the pseudo continuous variation will not be executed may be provided. Random number allocation (execution frequency) of ``Pseudo continuous failure effect → stop losing results'' in the game state is higher when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 than when the number of reservations is 2 to 3. (Both the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state may be configured as such). It may be configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation will be performed after prompting the player whether or not the variation will be performed. In addition, "pseudo consecutive failure effect" and "pseudo consecutive success effect" are effects using "special symbols" or specific numbers described later, for example, when "pseudo consecutive failure effect" is executed, After prompting the player whether or not the "special pattern" will temporarily stop in the middle row, the decorative pattern after one frame of the "special pattern" will stop (temporarily stop) in the middle row, and the "pseudo continuous success effect" will be performed. When it is executed, after prompting the player whether or not the "special symbol" should be temporarily stopped in the middle row, the "special symbol" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row. there is In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The content of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-time variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). It should be noted that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, at step 1414, the game content determination means MN outputs the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , information related to the determined main game symbols such as variation mode information, commands related to the current game state, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time period related to the main game symbol variation time to the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, at step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the main game symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation modes stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, at step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Go to step 1420 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change It is determined whether or not the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, at step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1420, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, at step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes at step 1430, at step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Note that even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1470, at step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1 (decrement). Next, at step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time saving number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, the specific game flag (main game probability variation flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Incidentally, even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1602, at steps 1604 and 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. to turn on. Next, at step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612. FIG.

On the other hand, if No at step 1602, at step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is ON. Then, if Yes in step 1610 , the process proceeds to step 1612 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, at step 1612, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off. Determine whether or not there is If Yes in step 1612, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big winning mouth electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning mouth electric role C21d) of the first big winning mouth C10 to make the first big winning. The opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614-1620.

Next, at step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, at step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10 It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (ball). If Yes in step 1624 , go to step 1628 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) and determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big winning opening is Determine whether or not it has passed. If Yes at step 1626 , the process also proceeds to step 1628 . If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 executes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second big winning opening C20). The drive is stopped to close the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20). Next, at step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer). Next, at step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes at step 1634, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, at step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Incidentally, even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability variable jackpot symbol (after the execution of the special game, the probability variable game state It is a big hit pattern to be shifted, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes at step 1652, at step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability variable game state after the execution of the special game, 4A and 4B in this example), step 1656. Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1997 process).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26, control processing executed by the sub-main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (especially on the side of the sub-main control unit SM) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 1(a) is the process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after reset such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control section SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, When various information commands are received → Reset the information related to the performance at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side). Next, at step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of reservations (for example, the value of the drawing reservation reservation counter) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed is not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next variation. After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. to run. Next, at step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a background effect control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 4(c) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line of the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM receives the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to new reservation occurrence It is determined whether or not the reservation information related to the game design has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 controls the binding reservation counter in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game, Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the second main game). Next, in step 2106, the design reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the reservation information (especially, the random number and the reservation prefetch group information related to the main game symbol lottery) ) is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means for book binding information SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the design reserve information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether a pattern variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2111, at step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2114, the design reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the design reservation information related to the pattern variation (particularly, the random number value related to the main game pattern lottery) from the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. , to shift the remaining pending information. Next, at step 2116, the design reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2118 also in the case of No in step 2111 .

Next, in step 2118, the design reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reservation display section SG12 and the second reservation display section SG13). The same number of reserved images as the drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, at step 2202, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2202, at step 2204, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2206, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( The first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) by referring to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation. is a so-called decorative symbol to be controlled, and details of its display size and operation contents will be described later). 7” and other numbers (hitting numbers), and in the case of a losing pattern, numbers such as “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game pattern is for a short time In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, and in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach performance) Temporarily stored in related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. ) is one line, and if the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line, it means a big win (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, in the left, middle, and right rows (or only in the middle row), in addition to number patterns, "special patterns" (when displayed on the effective line, do not mean a big hit, but after that, a big hit The display size and details of the operation will be described later) can be stopped (temporarily stopped), and the number patterns can also be temporarily stopped during the pattern fluctuation. It is It should be noted that the temporary stop is to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbols of all rows during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative symbols are , refers to a state in which variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter used with the same meaning). In addition, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo-continuous variation is not included in the stop mode that can be temporarily stopped (provisional stop), is not fixed, and notifies the big hit. A "special symbol" during execution of the look-ahead effect is configured so as not to be included in the stop mode in which a temporary stop (provisional stop) and a fixed stop are possible and a big hit is announced. .

Next, at step 2208, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( With reference to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, the second decorative symbol (as described above, the display is controlled based on the information from the main control board M side. (The details of the display size and operation contents will be described later.) (For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7.7.7 ”, and in the case of a losing pattern, a random number such as “1, 3, 5”} and variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game pattern fluctuates for a short time In the case of , non-reach, if it is a long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related Temporarily stored in information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. , and if the same number patterns are aligned on the activated line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the activated line, it means a loss). In addition, only number patterns can be stopped in the left, middle, and right columns (the "special pattern" does not stop like the first decorative pattern), and it is configured so as not to temporarily stop during the pattern fluctuation. . In this way, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to independently determine the display contents for notifying the success or failure of the main game symbols, that is, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols The decorative symbols have, as their basic properties, the property that they can independently notify the win/loss results related to the main game symbols.

Next, at step 2216, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the winning/failure result of the main game symbols and the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the details of the decorative design performance by referring to the decorative design performance table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design performance table 1 to the decorative design performance table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation details, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2218, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Transition. Note that even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbols whose display is controlled on the main control board M side are those on the first main game side (first main game symbols) or those on the second main game side ( Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbols. Regardless of which of the variable displays is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be executed in conjunction with it. However, in the time shortened game state (state accompanied by so-called power supply state), this is not the case. It is possible to exemplify a state in which only one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is allowed to perform the variable display in conjunction with any of the display.

Here, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (decorative symbol effect table 1, decorative symbol effect table 2) is a decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 1; And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 2, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit. In the drawings, for simplicity, the first decorative design may be referred to as the first design, and the second decorative design may be referred to as the second design (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of winning or failing the main game pattern (illustrated in the leftmost column, in this example, "losing" or "big hit") and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) variation mode (illustrated in the second column on the left, in this example only in the case of "pseudo continuous failure (total production time 30 seconds)" "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)" example) and obtained random numbers (random numbers obtained on the sub-main board SM side, part of which is shown in the third column on the left). In this example, it is configured to be able to determine "Main effect A-1 (losing) pseudo-run 1", "Main effect B-1 (big win) no pseudo-run", etc.). Then, when the content of the decorative pattern effect is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative pattern effect content = “A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)” and “display update content” = “equipment Figure fluctuation start (all columns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern)", "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display (left column), 2nd binding non-display". Then, as will be described later, according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the "display update content" reaching the "display update timing" is the first decorative symbol. It will be executed sequentially with respect to each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (losing) pseudo run 1" is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbols and all columns of the second decorative symbols are variably displayed, "display update timing" = "variation start 12 seconds later", if display control is performed so that all rows of the first decorative pattern are hidden (not displayed even if they are being variably displayed), then the second decorative pattern is , Display is controlled so that all columns are variably displayed (variable display is visible), and when the "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative symbol , the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display of the second decorative pattern is controlled so that all columns are not displayed (even the variable display is not displayed). . Thus, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible (easily visible) to the player, the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. While being in a state of being invisible (difficult to see), when the first decorative pattern is in a state of being invisible (difficult to see) to the player, the second decorative pattern is visible to the player ( In other words, in order to ensure that the player is notified that the symbols are changing, the second decorative symbols are displayed complementarily. In addition, the production pattern (series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1" and the production pattern defined by the name of other decorative pattern production contents are different (that is, the display contents are different ). In addition, the random number range is "0 to 1023" in all variation modes, and this figure extracts a part of the random number range in the design variation mode (therefore, it corresponds to a certain design variation mode The random number range of the acquired random number value and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the different illustration variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". range).

Here, in the present embodiment, so-called pseudo-continuous variation can be executed. (Losing) pseudo-run 2” and “B-2 (big hit) pseudo-run 2”. For example, in the decorative pattern effect content “A-2 (losing) pseudo-continuation 2”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)”, “display update content” = “start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)” 1 decorative design and all rows of the second decorative design)" is executed, "Display update timing" = "12 seconds after start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after start of fluctuation", "14 seconds after start of fluctuation" Display update content” = “1st drawing temporary stop display (left column)” (left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “1st drawing temporary stop display (right column)” (1st decorative pattern The right column is the stop display), and the "first design special design temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decoration design is the above-mentioned "special design" stop display) are sequentially executed. Then, after that, in the "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first decoration fluctuation start (all columns)" (only the first decoration pattern is displayed again with fluctuation) After execution, "display update timing" = "26 seconds after start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after start of fluctuation", "28 seconds after start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "1st layout temporary stop display ( left column)” (the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding temporary stop display (right column)” (the right column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding special pattern "Temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed with the above-mentioned "special symbols") is sequentially executed, so that for the player, during the one-time fluctuation display of the main game symbols, the As for one decorative pattern, it seems as if multiple pattern fluctuations have occurred (the appearance of this pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the manner in which the "special pattern" is stopped and displayed can be seen in the image diagram of FIG. 40). ).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed (a state in which the stationary display/variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative pattern is the above-mentioned "special pattern" The second decorative pattern is variably displayed when the game is temporarily stopped by pressing the second decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed in other cases. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol If the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol or cannot determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) cannot be distinguished}, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, so that the player can always choose one of them. The decoration pattern (either the first decoration pattern or the second decoration pattern) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In this embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop. Since the main purpose is to increase This is because it is configured not to display symbols that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as symbols that foretell the possibility of a big win afterward, although they do not mean anything. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), it may include a state of being displayed fluctuating at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage is visible). In the case of "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the state of being displayed fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from above and (temporary) fluctuation state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second decorative design is configured so as not to temporarily stop in the middle of the fluctuation (and the "special design" does not stop), but it is not limited to this, and the second decorative design As with the first decorative symbol, it may be configured such that a temporary stop can be made during the fluctuation (or a pseudo fluctuation can occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbols and all the rows of the second decorative symbols have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is performed. It is configured so that the types of symbols to be displayed are different.

Further, the second decorative symbols need not always be displayed during the variable display of the main game symbols, and the display conditions and display mode of the second decorative symbols may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) During the occurrence of a specific effect (instead of making the first decorative pattern invisible, an effect such as playing a movie moving image using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect (2) At the time of a specific ready-to-win effect (the second decorative pattern can be displayed), It is time to execute a ready-to-win performance in which the degree of expectation for a big hit remarkably increases instead of making the 1 decorative pattern invisible, and for example, the content of the performance displayed on the performance display device SG is forcibly stopped temporarily. The second decorative pattern is displayed only when executing the so-called freeze reach production), and the second decorative pattern is hidden in other ready-to-win productions (especially when executing the ready-to-win production with low expectations for big hits), 3) Differentiate the appearance position of the second decorative pattern on the effect display device SG according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-described movable accessory for effect moves into a state where it covers the display area on the effect display device SG). (4) The first decorative pattern can be moved, reduced, or enlarged. On the other hand, the second decorative design cannot be moved, reduced, or enlarged, or the probability of execution of movement, reduction, or enlargement, movement width, reduction rate, enlargement rate, etc. is the same as the first decorative design. It may be lower than, etc.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. If Yes at step 2302, at step 2304, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2306, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2309, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that even if No in step 2302 , the process proceeds to step 2310 .

Next, at step 2310, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2310, at step 2312, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2314, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs the first decoration based on the first decoration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the pattern variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 2330 .

On the other hand, if No at step 2314, at step 2318, the decorative design display control means SM21 changes the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2318, at step 2320, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is time to stop the above-mentioned "special design" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only in the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 puts an angel zone flag (for notifying that the expectation of a big hit will increase) in the flag area of the temporary storage means SM21b of the decoration display related information. A flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324 . On the other hand, if the answer to step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to step 2324 as well. Next, at step 2324, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative design (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). is executed) and the process proceeds to step 2330 . In the present embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, an "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect. , (1) during pattern fluctuations with relatively high expectations for big hits (for example, pattern fluctuations that result in reach), (2) at the time of stoppage of pattern fluctuations related to holding scheduled to be completed before pattern fluctuations with high expectations for big hits, etc. In addition, although details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or may be temporarily stopped in the case of (2) described above. You may stop after confirming.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the first composition variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2326, at step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command for the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2326 , the process proceeds to step 2330 .

Next, in step 2330, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative design is normally displayed (as described above, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative design). or when it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, and when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes at step 2330, at step 2332, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second design display flag (with respect to the second decorative design to the non-display state) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. flag for switching between ON=OFF and display=ON) is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No at step 2330, at step 2334, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

Next, at step 2336, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes at step 2336, at step 2338, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2340, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2342, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Note that even if No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350).

In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM uses the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 to manage the timing related to the variation display of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like. However, the method of managing the timing related to the variation of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this. Timing, notice image/reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received content. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any time (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flow chart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first design fluctuating flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second design display flag is ON. . In the case of Yes at step 2354, at step 2356, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display execution command for the second decorative design (command for variably displaying the second decorative design) (display command transmission at step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2354, at step 2358, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design variable display erase command (command for hiding the second decorative design) (step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 .

Next, at step 2360, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the second decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2364, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Note that even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative design display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the hold display (the hold for the first main game pattern and the hold for the second main game pattern may be displayed at the same time) are the effect display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in this embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the fixed display timing (timing when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed), etc. Since the first decorative pattern is the main decorative pattern, the visibility of the first decorative pattern is higher than that of the second decorative pattern (the displayed area is presumably larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start timing and the variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2402, at step 2404, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game in-progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. Big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of big win), and the process proceeds to step 2412 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2402 , the process proceeds to step 2412 .

Next, at step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. It may be executed appropriately as necessary based on the type, etc.).

Next, at step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot being executed and the jackpot symbols being stopped ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (For example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variable jackpot symbol, the transition to the probability variable game state after the special game is completed. An effect that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, at step 2414, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 2414, at step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big win on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win). Next, at step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). . Note that even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2502, at step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and step 2506. transition to Next, at step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the change (a part of the pseudo-continuous change) that triggered the transition to the "Angel Zone" has ended. determine whether If Yes at step 2506, at step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No at step 2502, at step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes at step 2512, at step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). . Next, at step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2516, at step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, the stages are looped in the order of flatland stage→space stage→volcano stage→flatland stage). Go), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520 . It should be noted that step 2520 is also executed when the result of step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516 is No.

Next, at step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side). is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed (variable display) in a state where the display/variation display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player can always select one of the decorative symbols. A user-friendly game machine can be provided that can be visually recognized, and whether or not the stopped symbols and the jackpot symbols are stopped can be accurately determined.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, the temporary stop symbol in the middle row always stops the "special symbol", and during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the first Although the second decorative pattern is configured to be hidden, the display control method of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modification 1 from the present embodiment, and only the points of modification from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 (decorative symbol effect table 3, decorative symbol effect table 4) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 3, especially part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, and , the decorative pattern effect table 4, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit). First, the first decorative pattern will be described in detail as to the changes from the present embodiment. In Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed even during fluctuation. Also, for example, when executing a pseudo-continuous variation such as "A-6 (losing) pseudo consecutive 2 (specific appearance)", at the timing of temporary stop of the middle symbol, the specific appearance is stopped in addition to the "special symbol" configured to be able to Here, a specific pattern is different from a "special pattern" in that all columns (left, middle, and right) are stopped with numbers, but are stopped according to a certain rule. (For example, an order such as "345"), and is configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation is being executed by stopping the specific number. In addition, in the modification 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, in the case of a loss, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, it is easier to stop the specific number than the "special symbol". On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbols" are easier to stop than the specific symbols at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the is stopped. It should be noted that the game is not limited to this, and there is no problem in constructing the game so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific number stops than when the "special symbol" stops. Also, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous variation, all the symbols are changed again, that is, after the three symbols are temporarily stopped, the three symbols are changed again, but in such a case , If the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row and then the middle row changes again, the decoration pattern in the middle row at the start of the re-fluctuation is no longer a "special pattern" {for example, "6 7 (★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of "667" (it is desirable that the middle symbol is the right symbol or the left symbol "± 1" frame)} may be configured as follows.

Next, changes from this embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the second decorative design. In Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols are always displayed while the main game symbols are changing. Further, in the case of ready-to-win, the second decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the same time as the temporary stop timing of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is also confirmed and displayed at the same time as the fixed display timing of the first decorative pattern. (The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). In addition, the variable display mode of the second decorative pattern is not limited to this. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden, that is, during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, during the temporary stop of the left and right columns, and at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the specific number is stopped. In the case of middle row, the second decorative pattern is hidden, while when the "special pattern" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed (or temporarily stop display). In addition, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbols. Also, the second decorative pattern may be always changed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first decorative pattern, and only when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped.

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous variation can be achieved by configuring the specific number to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. It is possible to provide a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop at the time of execution, and to make the degree of expectation for a big win different depending on the stop modes, so that the player can pay attention to which of the stop modes is. As a result, the amusement of the game is enhanced.

In addition, in the modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be variably displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured not to variably display (hide), or may be configured to hide only a specific column (for example, middle column).

In addition, in Modification 1 from the present embodiment, it is configured such that the specific outcome (or "special symbol") can be temporarily stopped at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row, but the specific outcome (or "special symbol") ) may be changed in the display mode of the left and right columns, for example, (1) the same number in the left column and the right column, and ±1 (For example, "4, 5, 4" or a "special symbol" is placed at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) in the same stop mode as a losing eye that is not a specific eye (3) Temporary stop in all columns at the same time (5) If the left and right column decorative patterns are numbers separated by "2" or more, the middle column decorative patterns are numbers separated by "2" or more from the left and/or right columns. It may be assumed that the temporary stop is made due to a failure at . In addition, the appearance condition of the specific outcome may also be changed. For example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to differ from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, the appearance of the "special pattern" (or the specific pattern) after the reach is higher than the appearance of the "special pattern" (or the specific pattern) when it is not the reach, or After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher expectation of a big hit than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured such that there is a high possibility of temporary stop again.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
Here, although the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol during pseudo continuous variation was mentioned in the present embodiment and Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol during pseudo continuous variation other than the configuration New playability can be created by the configuration of the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is Modified Example 2 from the present embodiment, and only the points changed from Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative symbol effect table 5, decorative symbol effect table 6) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 5, in particular, part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, and , the decorative pattern production table 6, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit). First, the first decorative design will be described in detail with respect to the modification 1 from the present embodiment. In the modification 2 from the present embodiment, the "special symbols" that are displayed during the variation of the first decorative symbol and that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous variation are "special symbol A" and " There are two types of "special pattern B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be temporarily stopped from the first middle row temporary stop timing (even after this timing) in the pseudo continuous variation, while the "special symbol B" is a pseudo continuous variation. It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the second temporary stop timing of the middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific number is configured so that a temporary stop can be made from the first middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous variation (even after this timing). That is, at the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, two types of "special symbol A" and the specific outcome can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous variation At the temporary stop timing, as a stop mode, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are configured so that three types of specific numbers can be temporarily stopped. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. In this way, in the temporary stop timings in the middle row of the pseudo-continuous variation, the number of types of stop modes may be increased toward the second half of the temporary stop timings, or the number of types of stop modes may be increased toward the second half of the temporary stop timings. may be configured to reduce In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases as the temporary stop timing in the second half is reached, there is a stop mode with a high degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit as a selection candidate type each time the pseudo variation is performed. It may be configured to be newly added, and by configuring in such a way, the player's attention will be focused each time a pseudo-variation is performed. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing in the second half is reached, a stop mode with a low expectation that the variation will be a big hit is selected as the type of selection candidate each time the pseudo variation is performed. It may be configured to be deleted, and with such a configuration, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit every time the pseudo variation is executed. In addition, since the second decorative pattern has the same configuration as that of Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, the temporary stop timing can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing is in the latter half. By increasing the number of stop modes, the player will pay attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stop mode at the time of the temporary stop, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two kinds of decorative patterns, a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, are provided. state), or in a situation where it is difficult to see, the second decorative design is displayed (variable display), but the configuration using the second decorative design is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modified Example 3 from the present embodiment, and only the points of change from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are steps 2232 (variant 3) to step 2236 (variant 3), step 2900 (variant 3), step 2246 (variant 3) and step 2248 (variant 3), that is, step 2204 At step 2232 (variant 3), after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the current game state is the probability variable game state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2234 (variant 3), the design display content determining means SM21n sets the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to the probability variable display mode (during the probability variable gaming state display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed), and proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2236 (variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to the non-variable display mode ( The display mode of decorative symbols to be displayed during the non-probability variation gaming state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to be different depending on whether or not the probability variation gaming state, and the first decoration When the pattern display mode changes (for example, when the non-probability variable game state shifts to the probability variable game state), the display mode of the second decoration pattern is also changed along with the change. It should be noted that the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not limited to a configuration in which they differ only depending on whether the state is a variable probability game state. It may be configured so as to differ depending on which production (production stage) is.

Next, at step 2900 (variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n executes the design stop design determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2246 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbols based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbols. Next, at step 2248 (Variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbols based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbols, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the design stopping design determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variant 3) in FIG. 31 in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, at step 2902, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol stop symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the number of rounds to be executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether or not 16R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to three "outline" designs (for example, "777") and Decide on one of the three sets of "black" patterns (for example, "444") (three sets of "white" patterns are selected) is 1:1 with the total allocation ratio selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to three "black" designs (for example, "444"). One of them is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 16R) in the case of a special game. In other words, it is almost certain that a special game with the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) will be executed when three white symbols are stopped. (It may be relatively more profitable for the player than a triplet of "black" symbols).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2910, the design display content determination means SM1n determines the stop design of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design. Next, at step 2912, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the second decorative design to a predetermined lost design (in this example, "345", and the stop design of the second decorative design is only one pattern. ), and shifts to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. It should be noted that the number of types of stop symbols of the second decorative design may not be limited to one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of types of stop designs of the first decorative design is smaller than that of the first decorative design. Further, the stop symbol when the second decorative symbol is lost is a predetermined missing symbol (in this example, "345"), while the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is lost is selected from a plurality of candidates. (for example, randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), the frequency of stopping the predetermined losing symbol at the time of losing is higher for the second decorative symbol than for the first decorative symbol ( It may be configured such that a predetermined lost symbol does not stop as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol). In addition, for all the stoppable losing symbols of the second decorative symbols (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used), when three of the same symbols are aligned, the highest value for the player is obtained in any game state. It may be configured such that at least one profitable symbol (eg, "7" symbol) is always included (eg, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to the display mode of the decorative design in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are changed depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability varying gaming state or the probability varying gaming state. The display modes (in this example, display colors, display attributes such as color pattern, shape, size, etc.) are configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variation gaming state, only the "7" symbol is displayed in "white" along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all symbols other than "7" are " While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (becomes a non-variable display mode), when it is in the probability variation gaming state, "3" symbols and "7" symbols are displayed along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white", and all the symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode can be different (probability variable display mode) depending on the game state. The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether it is in the probability variable game state, but it may be in the time reduction game state or not, and it is different depending on which background production (production stage) is being executed. It may be configured to allow In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether it is in the probability variable gaming state is the "3" symbol. It is included in a combination of predetermined losing symbols ("345" in this example) that causes the second decorative symbol to stop at the time of losing (becomes a stop symbol in the left column), and in a non-probability variable gaming state. , the stop symbols of the second decorative symbols at the time of loss are all displayed in "black", while in the probability variation gaming state, the stop symbols of the second decorative design at the time of loss are displayed in "white" from the left column. , “black”, and “black”.

Next, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (decorative symbol effect table 7, decorative symbol effect table 8) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 7, in particular, part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 8, especially a part of the case where the hit/fail result is a big hit). The difference from the present embodiment is that the item of decorative design type is changed to display update type, and three items of "first decorative design", "second decorative design" and "transmissive liquid crystal" are provided. In the modification 3 from the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute a transparent effect in which the J display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent, and during the period when the transparent effect is being executed, the first decoration The pattern is hidden, but the second decorative pattern is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3). In 1 (variation 3), the notice effect display control means SM24 performs a transparent effect (effect It is determined whether or not it is time to execute an effect in which the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. If Yes in step 2327-1 (variant 3), in step 2327-2 (variant 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). and transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2328. FIG. In addition, when the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent, and the state in which the accessories in the effect display device SG are driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative pattern is displayed. is erased (becomes hidden), and the second decorative design is continuously displayed by the second decorative design display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, a pending number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). By configuring in this way, the player can visually recognize the number of pending games even during execution of the transparent effect.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2410 (variant 3), that is, after setting the command related to the big hit display in step 2408, or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 ( In Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (step (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2412 . Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols are displayed even during execution of the special game. Whether or not the special game is being executed can be determined even during execution of the special game.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative pattern display device is provided on the far side (as seen from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( Light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative pattern and the pending number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, by outputting light from the light source, it is possible to display effects in the display area SG10. The display of the second decorative symbol and the display area of the reserved number by the two decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG can be visually recognized. It should be noted that even during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is being executed, so that it is visible to the player. By configuring in this way, even in a situation where the transparent effect is being executed, the player can recognize the changing state of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device. Become. In addition, the display of the number of reservations may differ depending on the game state (for example, the first main game reservation number is displayed in the non-time reduction game state, and the display the second main game reserve number), the first main game reserve number and the second main game reserve number may always be displayed, or the sum of the first main game reserve number and the second main game reserve number may be configured to display the number of pending Note that the configuration for displaying effects in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the display area SG10 can be switched between a transmissive state and a non-transmissive state. (For example, light is output from the oblique rear of the display area, etc.), or a light guide plate (a transmissive plate-shaped member that vertically scatters light emitted from the light emitting element that enters from the side) is used. A display area (so-called edge-light type) in which display is performed through a display area, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like may be used. In addition, as an example of a configuration using a light guide plate, as seen from the player side, from the front side, "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)", "light guide plate {arranged close to the transparent liquid crystal (approximately 5 mm), and the light guide plate A light source A for spreading light to the light guide plate is arranged near the outer periphery of the light guide plate}”, “Light source B constantly outputting light to the lower left of the display area SG10”, “role item”, “role When the light source C for emphasizing the object to be seen by the player is arranged in order, and a transmission effect is executed (when the player wants to emphasize the character to be seen by the player), the output of the light source A is turned OFF (light source The output of A may be reduced more than when the transparent effect is not executed), the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned ON, and the transparent effect is not executed (the player does not want to show the character to the player, and When the player wants to show the effect in the display area SG10), the output of the light source A and the light source B is turned ON, and the output of the light source C is turned OFF may be configured). In addition, the display of the second decorative design and the number of reserved display areas is not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, the second decorative design display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10) , The second decorative pattern and the pending number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by the same mechanism as the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by outputting light from the light source toward the display area SG10, that is, , by the second decorative pattern display device substituting for the light source, the second decorative pattern display device always outputs light even if the transmission effect is executed and the light source stops outputting light, 2 The display of the decorative pattern and the reserved number display area may be configured to be visible at all times (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of the liquid crystal).

Next, FIG. 39 is an image diagram of execution of a transparent effect in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state) (Pseudo consecutive 2 variation) One symbol variation is performed. This is an example of a case where First, a certain decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) starts to change, and then the special design is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stop design. After that, the variation of certain decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is started again, and after that, the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes a transparent state due to the execution of the transparent effect, and the back of the display area SG10 (game The player can visually recognize the state in which the accessory is driven (as viewed from the player). After that, the transparent effect is completed (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), and the accessory behind the display area SG10 (from the player's point of view) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is performed again. Visible (displayed). After that, in the case of losing, the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop at the losing design {the second decorative design stops at a predetermined losing design ("345"), and the first decorative design stops at the losing design. It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the losing symbol ("787")}. Also, in the case of a big hit, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped at the big winning design {the big winning design of the first decorative design and the big winning design of the second decorative design are the same combinations of stop designs. is going}. After that, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbols continue to be stop-displayed in the same jackpot pattern as at the start of the special game. Incidentally, even during execution of the special game, a transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be set to a transparent state). By structuring such that the transparent effect can be executed immediately before execution, the player can increase the expectation of shifting to the probability variable game state after the end of the special game by visually recognizing the transparent effect. In addition, even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative pattern and the display area of the number of reservations is maintained (because it is visible), so the progress of the game is not hindered. is configured as follows. As an example of the display of decorative patterns during a special game, for example, during a special game, only one pattern is displayed in order to inform the player which three decorative patterns are combined to form a big hit. (For example, if '777' results in a big hit, '7' is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the aligned symbols are not visible to the player. may be configured to maintain the display of the second decorative symbol and the pending number display area even during the special game in order to make it recognizable.

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and the character objects in the effect display device SG are visible. Even if the effect is executable and the first decorative pattern is hidden during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display in the second decorative pattern display device is executed, so the player can display the second decorative pattern. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the variation state of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations, so that the gaming machine can be made more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the entry of the ball into the first main game start port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the entry of the ball into the second main game start port B10 Different rates and different display attributes of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) depending on whether or not the game is in the variable probability game state can suggest or notify the player of high profit. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball is more likely to enter the second main game start port B10 than the non-probability variable game state in which the game progresses by entering the game ball into the first main game start port A10. The number of types of display attributes of the jackpot pattern, which is almost certain to transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is over, has increased, and currently It is possible to appropriately suggest or inform the player whether or not the game state of (1) is highly profitable for the player.

In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, regardless of the variation of either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the The decorative symbols of the display attributes are variably displayed, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the variations of the first main game symbols and the decorative symbols corresponding to the variations of the second main game symbols are displayed (and display attributes) in common. (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols).

(Second embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the result of the pattern fluctuation can be accurately recognized. can also be applied to a configuration that enables execution of Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is steps 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is information to be referred to when determining the contents of the look-ahead effect. That is, in step 1308, after storing the first main game content determination random number, in step 1322 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sets the flag of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. By referring to the area, it is determined whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), the winning result and the stop symbol related to the stored suspension is determined in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting commands relating to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999).

Next, in step 1330 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 predetermines the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the suspension based on the suspension information (fluctuation mode determination random number) (variation mode determination random number). For mode random number delimiter information and variation mode groups, see main game table 3 in FIGS. 41 and 42), and move to step 1332 (second). Also, if No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 issues a new hold command (a hold generation command for the first main game content determination random number, a command for variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. Incidentally, when the pattern information is transmitted to the sub-side as in the second embodiment, the sub-side may execute an effect suggesting a big hit as the effect to be executed. It is desirable to have a structure in which the player can be notified of the stop symbols of the main game symbols that are the big hits (the stop symbols are notified only when the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the big win).

Thus, in the second embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is obtained (or when suspension occurs), the variation mode random number separator information and the variation mode configured to determine a group;

In addition, at the timing when the suspension occurs, the main game content determination random number information, win/fail random number delimiter information, variation mode random number delimiter information, and variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side. The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, information related to the stop pattern of the main game pattern, information related to the profit mode of the main game pattern that will be a big hit (number of special game rounds related to the main game pattern scheduled to be stopped, etc. ), the number of reservations immediately after winning the reservation (either the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side, or the number of reservations on both the first main game side and the second main game side) {The win/fail random number separator information is the respective game states on the first main game side (second main game side) and the random value (or random value range) And, the winning lottery result, is one of the random number delimiter information grouped by linking, for example, even if it is a probability fluctuation gaming state or a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, it is a loss, a probability fluctuation gaming state Even if it is in a non-probability variation gaming state, it is a win, and if it is in a non-probability variation gaming state, it is a win, but if it is in a non-probability variation gaming state, it is a loss.

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game Determine whether the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), the winning result and the stop symbol related to the stored suspension is determined in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sends the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command related to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999).

Next, in step 1342 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 predetermines the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the suspension based on the suspension information (fluctuation mode determination random number) (variation mode determination random number). For mode random number delimiter information and variation mode groups, see main game table 3 in FIGS. 32 and 33), and move to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a new hold command (a hold generation command for the second main game content determination random number, a command for the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the next processing (processing of step 1400) is performed. .

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1334 (second), at step 1336 (second), the holding control means MJ30 determines that the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether or not If Yes in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

In steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determination random number and the second main game content determination random number are stored. is stored, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as value is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc.). to prevent it from being lost). In addition, regarding the success or failure lottery random number, the change in the game state (the change in the game state related to the already recorded suspension) from the acquisition of the success or failure random number to the execution of the success or failure lottery related to the success or failure lottery random number Not only the change, but also the possibility that the game state will change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of execution of the lottery lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). is configured to store the lottery random number until it is executed. In the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only when the hold related to the first main game occurs in the non-time-reduced game state. is configured so that it can be transmitted only when a hold related to the second main game occurs, but regardless of whether it is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game in any game state. In such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether or not to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the win/fail result information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Lost if low probability, D001H: Losing if low probability, Win if high probability, D002H: Win both low probability and high probability". Yes, a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability odd hit, D101H: 16R probability non-variability hit, D102H: 2R probability odd hit", to the sub-main control unit SM A specific example of the command related to the variation pattern random number delimiter information to be transmitted is "D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3".

Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. is an example. The difference from the present embodiment is that the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. Random number delimiter information is determined, and the number of variation mode groups (the number of delimited random numbers) and the variation time and random value range of the variation mode group differ (for example, , the same group 1 can have different ranges of random numbers), and by transmitting variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode group corresponding to the game state can be changed to the sub side. is configured to be derivable by That is, when the game state transitions between when the suspension occurred and when the suspension was completed, the variation mode group scheduled when the suspension occurred and the variation mode group executed when the suspension was completed may differ. (For example, when the hold occurred, the variation mode group was scheduled to be Group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state, but when the hold was completed, the time-reduced gaming state occurred, so the actual variation mode group became Group 2. However, with respect to variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned across all game states, when the sub-side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (subsequent game state Without considering the transition), it is possible to normally execute the so-called pending look-ahead effect. In addition, the fluctuation mode random number division information in FIGS. Depending on whether the state is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state, it is configured to form different variation mode random number division information, but is not limited to this, and whether it is a variation on the first main game side. One variation mode random number division including whether it is a variation on the second main game side, whether the winning lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the game state is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state. It may be configured to form information. In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The content of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-time variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). It should be noted that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2003 (second). Based on the information received from the control board M side), the number of reservations (for example, the drawing reservation reservation counter value) is restored. In addition, the information related to the effect being executed and the prefetch effect will not be restored (because the information related to the contents of the hold will not be resent from the main side), and the "preparing" screen will be displayed until the next change starts. . By configuring in this way, when a power failure occurs when the background effect is the "angel zone background", which will be described later, the information stored on the sub side is lost. After the return of , there is no information indicating that the trigger is pending, and the background effect is changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (background effect such as a flat stage, which will be described later). As a result, even if there is a discrepancy between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to power interruption (for example, due to noise at the time of power interruption or recovery from power interruption). Also, it is possible to avoid a situation where the main side is fluctuating with low expectations, while the sub side executes a high-expectation zone effect. It should be noted that the processing after power failure recovery is not limited to this. It may be configured to maintain the "Angel Zone Background". In the case of such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area is provided on the sub side so that information can be maintained even during a power outage, and in the event of a power outage, the information related to the presentation is backed up in the evacuation area, and the power outage is restored. It may be configured to restore backed-up information from time to time. Further, it may be configured to receive again the information on the content of the hold from the main side at the time of restoration from power failure, the start of fluctuation, the stop of fluctuation, and the occurrence of hold (also for hold other than the newly generated hold). {Although not particularly shown in this example, when power is restored, only information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (information related to the details of the hold is not transmitted) . Therefore, the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power is restored, so the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold. (It may be configured to receive information related to and execute a prefetch effect for the hold). It should be noted that if power interruption occurs during the fluctuation of the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of power interruption, the main side A black screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing", etc.) is displayed until the end command is received}. In the second embodiment, switching the background effect to display the "angel zone background" may be referred to as shifting to the "angel zone".

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are steps 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second) and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104 At step 2120 (second step), after adding 1 to the drawing reservation counter, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 receives the new reservation correctness result and stop pattern information transmitted from the main control board M side. is temporarily stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the design pending information display control means SM22, based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the pending information (in particular, the variation mode group, the variation mode random number separator information , etc.) are temporarily stored in the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, if the information related to the win/fail result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information is not transmitted from the main side, at step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second), This information is not temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, at step 2124 (second), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new reservation is the reservation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and step 2126 (second). transition to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes second main game winning time look-ahead determination processing described later, and step 2126 (second 2).

Next, in step 2126 (second), the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b to see if the new pending is trigger pending. It is determined whether or not (information indicating that the trigger is pending is added in step 2576 or step 2622). In the case of Yes at step 2126 (second), at step 2650 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes prefetch pending content determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118 . On the other hand, if No in step 2126 (second), the process proceeds to step 2118 as well.

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the design reservation counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the design reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the design variation (especially, the success/failure result, stop design information, (variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the temporary storage means SM22b for design reservation reservation information, the remaining reservation information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116. FIG.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. This processing will be described by dividing it into processing related to prohibition conditions for the prefetching lottery and processing related to the prefetching lottery. In the former prefetching lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending prefetching effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game pending (first main game pending) It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested with priority over the game side. In the case of Yes at step 2552, at step 2554, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2554, at step 2558, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a pending having information indicating trigger pending in the pending. Determine whether or not there is Here, the trigger suspension is a suspension of winning the prefetching lottery at the time of winning (first prefetching lottery at the time of winning the first main game, prefetching lottery at the time of the second main game winning). In the case of Yes at step 2558, at step 2560, the suspension look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a suspension that will result in a big hit in the suspension before the new suspension. determine whether If Yes at step 2560 , go to step 2562 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2562, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending is a big hit pending. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending variation mode group is group 3. determine whether As described above, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not a prefetch lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. Incidentally, when judging whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to judge whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a win-time prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, if step 2568 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2574 .

Next, at step 2574, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2574, at step 2576, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has been won in the prefetch lottery at the time of winning in the temporary storage means SM22b for the design reserve information. It adds information to that effect and temporarily stores it, and shifts to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

On the other hand, if No at step 2552 (if there is a second main game hold in the hold), at step 2578, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the binding hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the stored hold (if there is no hold that has information to the effect that it is a trigger hold, this process is not executed and the next ), and then to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. Incidentally, even if No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. In addition, in the processing of step 2578, when there is (occurs) a hold on the second main game side, in a gaming machine with a preferential completion on the second main game side as in the second embodiment, the newly generated second Since the hold on the main game side is consumed first, it is not possible to change the planned order of variation, and this is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which a look-ahead effect over a plurality of variations is not normally executed. In addition, as a prohibition condition for the look-ahead lottery, the condition that there is no hold of a specific variation mode group (or hold of a specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition good too.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flow chart of the second main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. This processing will be described by dividing it into processing related to prohibition conditions for the prefetching lottery and processing related to the prefetching lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the current game state is the time reduction game state. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a suspension having information indicating that it is a trigger suspension in the suspension. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 2604, at step 2606, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a big hit pending before the new pending. determine whether If Yes in step 2606 , go to step 2608 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2608, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending is a big hit pending. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes at step 2608, at step 2610, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k, for the new hold, a predetermined probability Yes, in this example, a win-time look-ahead lottery that wins at 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending variation mode group is group C. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k, for the new hold, with a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the prefetch lottery when winning the first main game for the lost hold) Yes, in this example, a win-time look-ahead lottery that wins on 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process proceeds to step 2620 as well.

Next, at step 2620, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the win-time look-ahead lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2620, at step 2622, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has won the win-time look-ahead lottery in the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information to the effect that it exists is added and temporarily stored, and the next process {process of step 2126 (second)} is performed. Note that even if No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in both cases in which a new hold results in a big win and a loss, the prefetch for the hold on the first main game side is higher than the prefetch lottery for the hold on the second main game side. The lottery is easier to win (predictive lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a big hit reservation = 1/3>predictive lottery when the second main game hold is a big hit reservation Winning rate = 1/5, Prefetching lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a losing hold = 1/10 > Prefetching lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is a big hit hold = 1 /15). By configuring in this way, even in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" related to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" related to the second main game side. It's getting easier.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flow chart of the prefetch suspension content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, at step 2652, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the trigger pending is a big hit pending. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the binding pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the pending trigger by referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), and then proceeds to the next process (step 2118). processing). On the other hand, if No at step 2652, at step 2656, the display mode of the pending trigger is determined by referring to the pending display mode determination table (when lost), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a pending display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and a pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing). In the second embodiment, the types of display modes that can be selected when determining the display mode of trigger suspension that can change when performing a suspension change effect with reference to the table for determining a pending display mode (at the time of a big hit) are rainbow color, There are four of red, green, and blue, and the types of display modes that can be selected when making a determination with reference to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of failure) are three of red, green, and blue, and pending display. A lottery is drawn using a random number exclusively for mode determination. In addition, red is most likely to be selected when referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and blue is most likely to be selected at the time of referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing). The expectation level of the jackpot for each display mode of the reservation when is occurred (expectation to hit the jackpot due to the pattern change related to the reservation) is selected only when the rainbow color is a big hit, and the color other than the rainbow color is the expectation level Red, green, and blue are in order from the highest. It should be noted that the changeable display mode is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased, or the changeable colors are changed. In addition, in this example, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the display color of the pending, but it is not limited to this, for example, in the case of a big hit (or together with the expectation of a big hit ), it may be configured to suggest the game state after execution of the special game. In such a configuration, especially during the probability variable gaming state, the display color of the suspension suggests the degree of expectation for shifting to the probability variable gaming state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big win in the suspension. (For example, if the reserved display color is red, the probability variation expectation is high, if it is blue, the probability variation expectation is low, etc.) By configuring so, it is possible to determine whether the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player continues or ends. It is possible to execute an inciting and effective production.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the pending change effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit can differ depending on the display mode selected from a plurality of types of pending display modes. Also, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of suspension change performances during execution of the look-ahead performance (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery to the end of the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the trigger suspension). With this configuration, for example, when the pending change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the pending change in the first pending change effect is blue, the second time The display mode of the suspension that changes in the suspension change performance is changed to green or red, that is, each time the suspension change performance is executed, the display mode changes (ranks up) to the suspension display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. It is desirable to configure it so that it will go (in order not to impair the player's sense of expectation). In addition, the production related to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a production mode that does not involve the pending display change may be provided. An effect mode (so-called false pattern) in which an effect occurs and the pending display does not change as it is, and an effect mode in which the pending display change is executed after that may be provided.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is about step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), the purpose of which is to stop the first decorative pattern (including temporary stop), especially the above-mentioned " To change a factor for determining a "special pattern" (that is, a pattern that does not mean a big win, but foretells that a big win may occur later). That is, in step 2204, after the pattern content determination permission flag is turned on, in step 2206 (second), the design display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n). refers to the symbol information (variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. {For example, when the variation mode related to the main game pattern is a short-time variation, non-reach, and when it is a long-time variation, a normal reach, a super reach, etc.} is determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), and the process proceeds to step 2208.

Also, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and the display update contents, in step 2250 (second), the design display content determining means SM21n performs the notice effect/decoration, which will be described later. A drawing stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218 . That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) is determined by the advance notice effect/design stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flow chart of the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2252, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the change is related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the announcement effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2260, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "special notice effect candidates". Here, the "special notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, at step 2262, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines the stop design (temporary stop design) of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design, and performs the next processing (the processing of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the aforementioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. In the case of "background" (that is, the state in which the existence of a reservation with a high degree of expectation for a big hit has already been notified), the above-mentioned "special pattern" (that is, although it does not mean a big hit, a big hit can occur after that) This is because if the symbols foreseeing the above are stopped and displayed, similar information will be reported twice, which may lead to an incomprehensible effect for the player.

On the other hand, if No at step 2252, at step 2256, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. If Yes at step 2256, at step 2258, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone entering flag is off. If Yes at step 2258 , go to step 2264 . On the other hand, if No in step 2258 , go to step 2260 .

Next, at step 2264, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "normal notice effect candidates". Here, the "normal notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, at step 2266, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stationary symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol to be the "special symbol", and based on the information regarding the stationary symbol of the main game symbol, the first decorative symbol is displayed. The symbols to be temporarily stopped on the left and right columns are determined (the symbols different from those on the left and right columns are to be temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the announcement effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is group 3. In addition to being excluded from the lottery of the angel zone transition lottery described later, the change related to the hold of Group 3 who did not win the look-ahead lottery (the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning) (did not become a trigger hold) will be subject to lottery}. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines that the variation is a pseudo-continuous variation (a variation in which the pseudo-variation is executed at least once; in this example, FIGS. 21 and 22 show examples). A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is determined as a variation to be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the announcement effect display control means SM24 selects an angel zone transition lottery (changing the background effect to or not) is executed. Next, at step 2276, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transfer lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2276, at step 2278, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from "normal notice effect candidates →special notice effect candidates after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, in FIG. 21). In the case of A-1 and A-2, until 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the content of the notice effect is determined from the "normal notice effect candidate", and after 14 seconds from the start of the change, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing , determine the content of the notice effect from the "candidates for the special notice effect"). Next, at step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the main game symbol for the first time (the first time in the pseudo-continuous variation) to the "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to the angel zone). (decorative pattern that informs the player that the stop mode), and shift to the next process (process of step 2218). Incidentally, the temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

On the other hand, if No at step 2270, step 2272 or step 2276, at step 2282, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "normal notice effect candidates". Next, at step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ).

In the second embodiment, in step 2274, an angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition to the variable angel zone is possible (the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle of the transition is set as a "special symbol", and the special symbol is selected). Whether or not to shift to the angel zone with the temporary stop as a trigger) is determined, but it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo-continuous pattern (first middle row temporary stop pattern) and the notice effect A plurality of candidates may be provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous variation, the combination of the pseudo consecutive symbols and the advance notice effect may be determined from among the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidates, "pseudo-continuous pattern A, notice effect 1", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect 2", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect 3", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect" Effect 4”, “Special pattern, notice effect 1” and “Special pattern, notice effect 2” are provided, and six combination candidates are provided. It may be configured such that when the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect in which the symbol is the "special symbol" is selected, the transition to the angel zone is made during the fluctuation. Incidentally, the method of determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advance notice effect is not limited to the case of the pseudo-continuous variation, and may be used in the case of other variation modes as well. Further, the combination is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern and the advance notice effects, and may include background effects, sound modes, and the like.

In addition, as a method of determining the notice effect, the basic notice effect of the notice effect (executable notice effect regardless of the background effect being executed, effect to be executed in the first half of the fluctuation, etc.) was decided first. After that, based on the determined basic notice effect, decide the effect that is not the notice effect such as background effect, execute the decided effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.), and then decide An undetermined effect of the advance notice effects may be determined based on the basic advance notice effects and the effects other than the advance notice effects such as the determined background effects (the determination method may be repeated a plurality of times). , may be configured to determine all of the advance notice effects to be executed in the variation). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the notice effect to be executed with the variation at a plurality of timings, and all the notice effects to be executed with the variation are determined at one timing. Defects and the like in production can be reduced. In this example, (1) "fixed stop": the fixed stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the pattern combination that is fixed and stopped is a big hit (three of the same pattern are aligned), the game shifts to a special game. (2) "Temporary stop": Temporary stop is executed before fixed stop (for example, shaking fluctuation), and once Pseudo-variation can be executed by temporarily stopping in the middle of the fluctuation in the design fluctuation and then changing again, (3) If a "special design" is displayed during the execution of the look-ahead effect, the "special design" is a fixed stop. It is configured not only to be displayed, but also to be displayed as a temporary stop before final stop. Also, in this example, fixed stop and final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both fixed stop and temporary stop. , and the stop pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern is used for both the temporary stop pattern and the fixed stop pattern (if the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is "777", etc., the stop pattern = It is a fixed stop pattern).

Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram showing an example of the notice effect/arrangement stop pattern display. As shown in the upper part of the same image diagram, in this example, when transitioning to the angel zone in the change, the normal background effect (an example of the background effect that is not the angel zone background effect) is being executed as the background effect, The "special symbol" is stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. In addition, with the temporary stop of the "special symbol" as a trigger, an angel zone background effect is executed as a background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In this example, the case of a big hit is exemplified, but the background effect is configured to switch in the same way in the case of a loss. The decorative pattern may be a loose pattern (different pattern), but it may not be (the same pattern) (= "special pattern" may be temporarily stopped after reaching)}.

Also, as shown in the middle of the same image diagram, in this example, when other pseudo-continuous fluctuations without transition to the angel zone are performed (when the angel zone transition lottery is not won), the normal background effect is used as the background effect is being executed, the first middle row temporary stop symbol is "pseudo continuous symbol A" (different from the "special symbol", a temporary stop symbol that informs the player that the pseudo continuous variation is being executed. ) temporarily stops. Next, even after the "pseudo continuous symbol A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

Also, as shown in the lower part of the same image diagram, in this example, under the circumstances where the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, if the winning lottery is won, the change will stop when the fluctuation is stopped. As a pattern, the missing pattern (separate eyes) stops. After that, the next variation is started, and the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol of the variation (that is, the variation is the pre-reading angel zone entry variation). Next, when the "special symbol" stops, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next change (that is, the next change is the first change in the look-ahead zone). In this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be consumed before the trigger suspension, it is not temporarily stopped except for the fixed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when changing again after temporarily stopping as a stop symbol of pseudo fluctuation). That is, in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be consumed before the trigger suspension, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension from "the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo variation is executed and the symbol variation becomes a loss" It cannot be done until the Angel Zone background is displayed. Thus, in the second embodiment, the angel zone background effect is executed with the stop (or temporary stop) of the "special symbols" as a trigger, so that the player can stop the "special symbols". (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize that it will move to the angel zone, and not only at the time of fluctuation stop (stop related to confirmation display), but also at the time of temporary stop in the middle of fluctuation It is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the stop (or temporary stop) of the "symbol".

In addition, as shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" stops as a temporary stop symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the same number on the left column and the right column stops (temporary stop) (at the time of reach (Same as the stop mode) On the other hand, when the "special pattern" stops as the final stop pattern of the next change after winning the prefetch lottery, different numbers (discrete eyes) in the left and right columns are configured to stop. there is

Next, FIG. 50 is a flow chart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting "angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, in step 2506 (second), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines the variation (a part of pseudo-continuous variation) that triggered the transition to the "Angel Zone" (or related change) {The change that triggered the transition of the "Angel Zone" (or the change related to the hold) is the change related to the trigger hold, or the change related to the change angel zone transition} has ended or not. judge. If Yes in step 2506 (second), go to step 2508 ; if No, go to step 2520 .

With the configuration as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern as the decorative patterns, and is configured to be capable of executing a so-called reserved look-ahead effect. When the "special symbol" is stop-displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the degree of expectation for transition to the special game increases is executed. Then, regarding the hold that is the order of digestion before the hold (trigger hold) that triggers the hold look-ahead effect, the "special pattern" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop pattern when the pattern of the first decorative pattern changes at the time of digestion of the hold. Therefore, the significance of the stop display of the "special symbol" in this case is that "symbol variation has ended" and "the degree of expectation for transition to the special game has increased". On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern fluctuates at the time of digestion of the hold, the "special design" can be stop-displayed as a temporary stop design. , ``symbol fluctuation re-fluctuation'' and ``expectation for shift to special game increased''. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the same kind of "special symbols" have different meanings depending on the timing (or situation) when they are stopped and displayed. It can be done.

In addition, in the second embodiment, regarding the hold that is in the order of digestion before the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern changes at the time of digestion of the hold, the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol. , Regarding the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern fluctuates at the time of digestion of the hold, the "special pattern" is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop pattern, and the "special pattern" is the same type. However, it is not limited to this, and the "special design" in the former case may be set to "special design A", and the "special design" in the latter case may be set to "special design B". By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbols" in both. Also, the probability of displaying the "special symbol" in the former case may be lower than the probability of displaying the "special symbol" in the latter case.

Also, in this example, the number of symbol rows of the first and second decorative symbols is three, and the number of effective lines is one. Triggered by the stop of the symbol row and/or the effective line increases (for example, the effective line becomes 9 lines) (2) Triggered by the stop of the "special symbol", the symbol row and/or the effective line The number of lines decreases (for example, the number of symbol rows becomes two, and one of the symbols stops to enter the reach state, and furthermore, the number of symbol rows becomes one. may be configured such that the difference in the profit rate given to the player is notified by the type of the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, depending on the timing (or situation) when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed, the "special symbol" has a different meaning. It is possible to create even more novel production methods by enhancing the interlocking with. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as modification 1 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the modification 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2220 (second modification 1) to step 2224 (second modification 1). The content of the effect in 3 is configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, after determining the content of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and display update content, in step 2220 (second variation 1), the design pending information display control means SM22 outputs the design pending information. By referring to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the suspension display mode related to the change is a dedicated effect display mode (specific suspension display mode different from other suspension display modes, red in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 2220 (second variation 1), in step 2222 (second variation 1), the announcement effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the announcement effect from the "dedicated announcement effect candidates". Here, the "dedicated advance notice effect candidate" is a effect candidate that is selected only in the change related to suspension of the dedicated effect display mode (in this example, red) that is a specific suspension display mode. , a configuration in which a battle effect with a specific enemy character is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation related to the "dedicated notice effect candidate" is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is relatively high compared to the other notice effect candidates. Next, at step 2223 (second variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, and step 2218. transition to If No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2250 (second). Here, if the configuration is made so that the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the reserved display mode is a dedicated effect display mode and the first decorative symbol is displayed. It is possible to further enhance interlocking with the fact that the "special symbol" is likely to be selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment, as the notice effect candidate, the reserved effect display mode (red in this example), which is a specific reserved display mode, is displayed. At the time of execution of a pending change effect (a effect in which the pending display mode changes) based on the winning of the pre-reading lottery, , it is possible to provide a notice effect that is executed only when the change to a specific hold display mode is performed, and by increasing the expectation of a big hit when the effect is executed, the player can decide whether to hold when the hold changes. Attention is paid to the display color (holding change execution mode), and the amusement of the game is enhanced. Further, in the modification 1 from the second embodiment, the effect to be executed by the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension is not determined when the trigger suspension occurs, but is determined when the trigger suspension is completed. By configuring in this way, "a trigger hold occurs → a hold display mode is determined and displayed in that display mode → a trigger hold is digested → a hold display related to the trigger hold Based on the aspect, the effect to be executed in the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension can be determined. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration related to the pending digestion transfer image, which will be described later, is applied to Modification 1 from the second embodiment.

In addition, in the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, a pending change effect is executed as a so-called pending look-ahead effect, and when the pending display mode becomes a dedicated effect display mode (red in this example), the notice effect content is configured to be selected from the "dedicated notice effect candidates", but the suspension change effect is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol is stopped. and the stop of the "special design" may be further linked, for example, as the "special design", "special design A" and "special design B" are provided, In this case, the suspension change performance may be changed to a suspension display mode other than red, and when the "special symbol B" stops, the suspension change performance may be changed to a red suspension display mode. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to further enhance the linkage between the so-called reservation look-ahead effect and the "special symbol".

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the interlocking between the so-called pending look-ahead effect and the "special symbol" is further enhanced. An example of such a configuration is Modification 2 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 52 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the modification 2 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250(1) (second variant 2) and step 2250(2) (second variant 2), the purpose of which is To control to change the selection rate of a "special symbol" according to whether the symbol variation is on the game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. That is, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and display update contents, in step 2226 (second variation 2), the design display contents determination means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. With reference to the means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second variant 2), in step 2250 (1) (second variant 2), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect and design stop pattern, which will be described later. Execute the process and move to step 2218 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second variant 2), in step 2250 (2) (second variant 2), the design display content determining means SM21n causes the second main game notice effect and design stop, which will be described later. A pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218 .

Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in modification example 2 from the second embodiment. is a flow chart. The processing of this subroutine is the same processing as the notice effect/design stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), so the explanation is omitted. In the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side. The purpose is to execute separate processes on the first main game side and the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 54 shows the second main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the modification example 2 from the second embodiment. is a flow chart. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the notice effect/design stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only the differences from this processing will be described in detail. Step 2250 (second) differs from the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process in step 2286 (second change 2) and step 2288 (second change 2). If there is no trigger pending in step 2286 (second variation 2), the announcement effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is the change related to group C. Determine whether or not If Yes at step 2286 (second variation 2), at step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the variation is a pseudo-continuous variation. determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets a predetermined probability (1 A lottery for moving to the angel zone, which is less than /10, and in this example, 1/30), is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2276 . If No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2282 .

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo The "special pattern" is temporarily stopped by continuous variation, and the winning probability of the lottery of whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as a background effect is different, so that the pattern variation on the first main game side It is possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the side of the second main game. By differentiating the accompanying performance tendency and the performance tendency accompanying the pattern variation on the second main game side, the range of the performance can be widened and the interest in the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, in the modification 2 from the second embodiment, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the second main game hold cannot become a trigger hold. Suspension look-ahead effect for the suspension of the game side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time-reduced game state, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the reserved look-ahead effect on the first main game side and the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the reserved look-ahead effect of the second main game side are compared. However, the appearance rate is different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as described above, the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. ("Special symbols" are temporarily stopped with a higher probability in response to symbol fluctuations on the first main game side), and the likelihood of trigger suspension is also on the first main game side. , depends on whether the hold is on the second main game side (the hold on the first main game side is more likely to be the trigger hold), so the trigger hold occurs → the hold that is completed before the trigger hold At the time of digestion, the "special pattern" is confirmed and displayed (so-called pending look-ahead effect is executed) → When the trigger hold is digested, the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). It is also possible to configure the probability of occurrence of the series of effects to be higher on the first main game side than on the second main game side. In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol and the pseudo continuation in the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the variation, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead effect in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation, the difference related to the pseudo-continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

In addition, in this example, (1) the first main game side and the second main game side may have the same selection probability (appearance rate) of "special symbols", and (2) the holding of a big hit is possible. When it exists in the second main game reserve, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect does not appear due to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol. (4) “Special symbols” related to pseudo-continuous variation in the case of a big hit variation of the second main game symbols. (5) "special symbols" related to the pseudo-continuous variation appear or tend to appear in the case of a big hit variation of the first main game symbols. In addition, in Modification 2 from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured to appear both during the look-ahead effect and during the pseudo-continuous variation, but the "special symbol A" can appear only during the look-ahead effect. "Special symbol" and "Special symbol B" are regarded as "special symbols" that can appear only at the time of pseudo-continuous variation, and the rate of appearance of "Special symbol A" and "Special symbol B" are compared to determine the number of second main game symbols. It may be configured such that "special symbol A" does not appear in variation, and "special symbol B" has a low appearance rate in variation of the second main game symbol.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the pending change effect are configured to be executable as the so-called pending look-ahead effect, but by changing the execution mode of the pending look-ahead effect, a new playability is created. It is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as modification example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variant 3) and step 2750 (second variant 3). In the second variation 3), the sub control board S executes a pending display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2750 (second variation 3), the sub control board S executes pending digestion transmission image display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300 .

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), the purpose of which is to notify that a certain hold is being digested (symbols are changing) at the time of digestion of a certain hold. image can be displayed. That is, in step 2112, after subtracting 1 from the design reservation counter value, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the design reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information (in particular, the display mode and variation mode group information), "holding digestion transmission image information" temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the preliminary announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b as information relating to the "holding consumption transmission image" to be continuously displayed even after being digested), and the process proceeds to step 2128 (second). do. Incidentally, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, the second main game winning prefetch determination process is deleted (the prefetch lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second modification 3) of FIG. 56 in modification example 3 from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the processing related to the former prefetch lottery prohibition condition, first, in step 2580, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the temporary storage means SM22b for the pending prefetch effect, and the new pending is the second main game. It is determined whether or not it is a hold (a hold that is prioritized over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes at step 2580, at step 2582, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2584, at step 2586, the pending look-ahead effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the pending variation mode group before the new hold becomes group 1. (There is no hold that will result in a big hit before the new hold, hold that can be a long variable time, or trigger hold). If Yes at step 2584 , go to step 2586 .

Next, in the process related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2586, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending variation mode group is Determine whether or not it is Group 3 {Variation related to the hold whose variation mode group is Group 3, even if the number of holds at the start of the change is large (for example, the number of holds is 2 or 3) , a relatively long fluctuation time}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, if the hold is a big hit hold, the probability is 2/3, and if the hold is a loss hold, the probability is 1/8). A prefetching lottery is executed when winning a prize. Next, at step 2590, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determining means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2590, at step 2591, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information to the effect that it is "trigger pending" to the new hold that has won the win-time look-ahead lottery, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be "yellow block reservation", and is stored in the temporary storage area for temporary storage of temporary storage information for book binding SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the prefetching lottery at the time of winning, and the display mode of the hold can be different from the display mode of the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether the new hold (trigger hold) is appropriate or not, and based on the number of holds at the present time, a hold change plan ( For example, the production execution plan (e.g., change to green block reservation at the start of the next fluctuation, change to red block reservation at the start of the next fluctuation, etc.) is determined, and stored in the temporary storage area of the temporary storage means SM22b, The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2580 (when the new suspension is the second main game suspension), in step 2596, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores in the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold (if there is no hold with the information that it is a trigger hold in the hold, this process is executed and proceed to the next process), change the pending display mode to "normal pending" (for example, white pending), store it in the pending information temporary storage area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and step 2594. transition to Note that if step 2582 , step 2584 , step 2586 or 2590 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2594 .

Next, in step 2594, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines the pending display mode of the new hold to be "normal hold" (for example, white hold), It is stored in the pending information temporary storage area, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118). Here, in the processing of steps 2596 and 2594, when there is (occurs) a hold on the side of the second main game, in a gaming machine such as this example where the second main game preferentially completes, the newly occurred Since the hold on the second main game side is consumed first, it is not in the order of change that was planned, and the look-ahead effect over multiple changes (for example, the hold display mode change effect based on the hold change plan) is not executed normally. This is a configuration to avoid

Next, FIG. 58 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are Step 2208 (Second Variation 3), Step 2222 (Second Variation 3) to Step 2226 (Second Variation 3) and Step 2228 (Second Variation 3), that is, In step 2206 (second), after determining the variation mode of the first decorative pattern, in step 2208 (second variation 3), design display content determination means SM21n (and notice effect display content determination means SM24n, ready-to-win effect display) The content determination means SM25n) refers to the design variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, non- In the case of reach, long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b). Temporarily store. Next, at step 2216, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the winning/failure result of the main game symbols and the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the details of the decorative design performance by referring to the decorative design performance table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design performance table 1 to the decorative design performance table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation details, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2222 (second variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n randomly determines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variation. Here, as shown in the illustration of the content of the notice on the right side of the figure, in this example, the contents of the notice effect that can be executed are configured to differ depending on the image (so-called stay stage) set as the background effect. The content lottery for the announcement effect to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number obtained by the sub-main control section SM, the result of the change, winning symbols, change time, and the like. Here, the content of the notice effect marked with a star in the same image diagram is the specific notice effect in this example, and is configured so that different specific notice effects can be executed based on the stay stage (specific notice effect will be explained later in the process). Also, the contents of the notice effect (in this example, the effect that can be executed before the ready-to-win effect etc.) are not limited to this. (In that case, the pending digestion transmission image described later in the pseudo-continuous effect and the display mode of the suspension may be changed, and the pending digestion transmission image described later may be changed by the advance notice effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect. (You may change the display mode of

Next, at step 2224 (second variation 3), the layout display content determination means SM21n refers to the "holding digest transmission image information" temporarily stored in the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the change is It is determined whether or not the change is related to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second variant 3), in step 2226 (second variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n stores the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (or the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), and based on the "holding digestion transmission image information" related to the propriety of the change, the variation mode, or the advance notice effect, the hold digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped: yellow block hold → green block Suspension, continuous button hits during reach: execution plan of effects such as change from green block hold to red star hold) is determined, stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2218. - 特許庁It should be noted that even if No in step 2224 (second variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2218 .

Next, in steps 2218 and 2228 (second variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21. , the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag is turned on, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) is performed.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variant 3) of FIG. 55 in the third variant from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b to determine whether or not the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2704, at step 2706, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes at step 2706, at step 2708, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 confirms the reservation change plan stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2710, the design pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the pending display mode during the change, based on the pending change plan.

In the case of Yes at step 2710, at step 2712, the design reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and during the notice effect executed during the fluctuation, the specific notice effect (see FIG. 49) is displayed. ) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice mode temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. , determines whether or not the execution timing of the specific advance notice effect has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2714, the process proceeds to step 2718 (in accordance with the execution of the specific advance notice effect, the pending display mode is changed).

Here, FIG. 60 is a hold change image diagram in the specific advance notice effect. In this example, an example will be described in which the display mode of the suspension is changed by a grassy notice in a flat zone (in particular, a grassy notice in which a snake appears as a specific notice effect). First, in a state in which a trigger hold exists in the hold, a change related to the hold before the trigger hold starts {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is normal hold (white hold)}.

Next, a grassy notice, which is a notice effect during the change, is executed, and an image of searching for something by pushing through the grass is displayed.

Next, an image is displayed in which a snake (expectation for a big hit during the variation is "low") appears from behind a bush.

Here, if there is no plan to change the pending display during the change, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass and leaving the screen is displayed, and the advance notice effect ends.

On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, unlike the above case, an image of a snake emerging from the shadow of the bush and jumping into hold (the trigger hold that is normally held at this point) is displayed. be. After that, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) where the snake jumped in changes, and is displayed in a hold display mode different from the normal hold (in this example, a small hold). It should be noted that an effect (so-called fake effect) in which the display mode of the suspension does not change even if the specific advance notice effect is executed may be executed.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific advance notice effect is not executed during the change), in step 2716, the design pending information display control means SM22 performs a general purpose pending change effect (executable independently of other effects). In addition, it is a production that can be executed in any production stage, for example, a production that the hold explodes) Set a command to display (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 ) and go to step 2718 .

Next, in step 2718, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger pending based on the pending change plan stored in the pending binding information temporary storage means SM22b, and It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2720, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the pending display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next processing {step 2750 (Second variation 3) processing}. If No at step 2704, step 2706 or step 2710, the process proceeds to step 2720. If No at step 2702 or step 2714, proceed to the next process {step 2750 (second variation 3) process}. Transition.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of pending digestion communication image display processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, at step 2752, the design reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the pattern changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2752, at step 2754, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b to determine whether the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag is off. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the composition pending information display control means SM22 controls the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image based on the pending digestion transmission image information temporarily stored in the preliminary announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (initial display mode) is determined. Here, the hold digested transfer image is an image that continuously displays the hold related to the change even during the change (after the start of the change and the hold related to the change is digested). . By displaying the pending digestion transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the change is the change related to the small hold even during the change related to the hold (for example, the small hold) in which the display mode has changed in the hold. , during the change, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image.

Next, at step 2758, the design pending information display control means SM22 turns on the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag in the flag area of the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, if step 2754 is No, the process proceeds to step 2760 as well.

Next, at step 2760, the design reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the preliminary announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and confirms the reservation digest transmission image change plan. Next, at step 2762, the design pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image or delete it during the change based on the pending digestive transfer image change plan. do. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 controls the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the pending digestion transmission image change plan. It is determined whether or not the change timing (for example, the start of re-fluctuation after the temporary stop display of pseudo consecutive symbols, the execution of a predetermined effect, a predetermined period during the ready-to-win effect) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2764, at step 2766, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 sets the pending digestion transmission image display mode change condition (for example, pressing the sub-input button during a predetermined period, maximum number of pending, etc.) is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in steps 2768 and 2770, the binding pending information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general-purpose pending change effect (for example, a pending effect that explodes) (display command transmission in step 2999). (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan (for example, red star pending, green square pending, no display, etc. display mode), and stores it in the temporary storage means SM22b for binding pending information, and proceeds to step 2780. It should be noted that if step 2762 or step 2766 is No, the process proceeds to step 2780 as well.

Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of the image change of pending digestion transfer. The change in the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image in Modification 3 from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in a flow as illustrated in the figure. In this example, a pattern is illustrated in which the battle presentation does not end in the first half and shifts (develops) to the battle presentation (second half). First, a change related to trigger hold (currently, small hold) starts, and small hold is displayed as a hold digestion transfer image.

Next, a battle effect (first half) is executed as the effect during the change. In this example, if the pending digestion transmission image is a small hold, the display mode of the small hold can be changed by pressing the sub-input button a predetermined number of times during the execution of the battle effect (first half) in the variation. is configured to In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub-input button during execution of the battle effect (first half). Since it is not particularly executed, the operation of the sub-input button is input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub-input button a predetermined number of times) during the battle production (first half), each time you press the sub-input button, an attack will be added to the Zako hold displayed as the hold digestion transmission image. The effect image is displayed.

Next, when the number of sub-input button presses in the battle production (first half) reaches a predetermined number of times, an image is displayed in which Zako hold, which is a hold digestion transfer image, explodes, and based on the hold digestion transfer image change plan, The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of pending is changed to red star pending or no display). In addition, even after the transition to the battle production (second half), the pending digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode is changed. Since there is an intention to predict the degree of expectation for the big hit of the change according to the display mode of the transmission image, even after the shift to the battle production (second half), the pending digestion transmission image continues to be displayed in the display mode after the display mode change. }.

On the other hand, if the button is not repeatedly hit (or the number of repeated hits is less than a predetermined number) in the battle production (first half), the slow hold, which is the hold digest transmission image, is automatically exploded at the timing of shifting to the battle production (second half). When the image is displayed, the display of the pending digestion transmission image is erased. clears the display regardless of the contents of the In addition, in this example, the degree of expectation for a big hit with low reserve is medium, and the degree of expectation for a big win with red star reserve is high. Further, when the battle effect (second half) is executed, the degree of expectation for big wins rises at once compared to the case where the battle effect (first half) is executed. Here, under the situation where the expectation of a big hit has increased after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of Zako reservation with a medium level of expectation of a big hit is continued, the battle production that is a production with a high expectation of a big hit Although it may spoil the interest of the (second half), at the timing when the high-expectation production {this example, battle production (second half)} starts, the production with low expectations (in this example, Zako hold) By erasing, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly shown in this example, even if the number of times the sub-input button is pressed is less than a predetermined number, at the timing of changing the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan It may be configured to automatically change the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when the change to the display mode that suggests that the expectation of the big hit is high in the variation is scheduled. may be configured as follows. In addition, when the button is not repeatedly hit (or the number of repeated hits is less than a predetermined number), the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed at a predetermined timing only when the change is a big hit or a variable probability big hit. (So-called hitting effect can be executed).

Also, when transitioning to the battle production (second half) without going through the battle production (first half) {For example, design change start (all columns) → notice production 1, design temporary stop display (left column) → design temporary Stop display (right column) → Instigate reach development → Battle reach (second half) image display → Design temporary stop display (middle row) → Execution of production according to success → Production confirmation display (all rows) }, i.e., when the period during which the button is repeatedly hit {in this example, the battle production (first half)} does not exist and the battle production (second half) is entered, the timing at which the battle production (second half) is entered. Then, the pending digestive transfer image, which is the pending digestive transfer image, is automatically exploded, and the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image is changed and displayed based on the pending digestive transfer image change plan. Although not shown in this example, the number of times the sub-input button is pressed, which is necessary to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, has a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation (a high-expectation pending display mode ) may be configured so that a larger number of times is likely to be selected. Also, although not particularly shown in the present example, when the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose pending change effect, the effect that suggests the content of the change (for example, when the zako hold explodes It may be configured to be able to execute a death warning that emits a line to. The contents suggested by the death notice include the degree of expectation for the big hit of the change and the content of the scheduled performance (for example, "Achichii!" = 60% or more expectation for the big hit, "Congratulations!" = = development of battle reach with the boss character, etc.), but if the player does not press the sub-input button, the degree of expectation for the big win related to the change is set. Assuming that the player does not want to make a prediction, it is preferable to configure so as not to execute the death spell prediction related to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the variation (only the death spell prediction related to the content of the performance scheduled to be executed can be executed). . That is, only when the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image is changed by the player's operation, it is possible to execute the advance notice performance related to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the variation based on the result of the success or failure of the variation. It should be noted that the battle effect (first half) effect can be executed in "a4" and "b4", which are variable times of 30 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 2764 (if it is not the timing to change the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image), in step 2772, the binding pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image. It is determined whether or not it is time to erase the In the case of Yes at step 2772, at step 2774, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 sets the display mode erasing conditions for the pending digestion transfer image (for example, no pressing of the sub-input button during a predetermined period, number of times of pressing the sub-input button is less than a predetermined number of times, etc.) is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2774, in steps 2776 and 2778, the binding pending information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general-purpose pending change effect (for example, a pending effect that explodes) (display command transmission in step 2999). transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image to "no display" (change to "no display" regardless of the content of the pending digestion transmission image change plan ) and temporarily stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780.

Next, at step 2780, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 sets a command to display the pending digestion transmission image based on the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image temporarily stored in the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2752, in step 2782, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digestion transmission image display flag in the flag area of the binding display related information temporary storage means SM21b. . Next, at step 2784, the design pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image to "no display" and temporarily stores it in the temporary design pending information storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 displays the pending digestion transfer image based on the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image temporarily stored in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (this process Then, the command to hide the pending digestion transmission image is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the next process (process of step 2300) transition to

In addition, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, it is configured so that the pending digestion transmission image can be displayed, but the pending digestion transmission image may not always be displayed. It may be configured such that the pending digestion transmission image corresponding to the suspension digested as it is is not displayed, and the suspension digestion transmission image corresponding to the suspension whose suspension display mode is changed from the normal suspension is displayed. With such a configuration, the player confirms the pending digestion transmission image at the timing when the player wants to know the degree of expectation for the big win of the symbol change, and if the pending digestion transmission image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high, If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flow chart of background effect control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 46 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2524 (second variant 3) to step 2534 (second variant 3). In 2 change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decorative design based on the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the start timing has been reached. If Yes at step 2524 (second variation 3), at step 2526 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, It is determined whether or not there is a holding that wins the prefetching lottery at the time of winning the first main game. If Yes in step 2526 (second variant 3), in step 2528 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). do. Next, at step 2530 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2528 (second variant 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone shift lottery has been won. . If Yes in step 2530 (second variant 3), in step 2532 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn it on and go to step 2504 .

Also, in step 2504, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect, in step 2534 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 stores the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the design pending information temporary storage means SM11b. By referring to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension has ended. If Yes in step 2534 (second variation 3), go to step 2508 ; if No, go to step 2520 .

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment, the sub-main control can It is possible to change the display mode of the suspension on the part SM side and display it, and when a predetermined notice effect (in this example, it is a specific notice effect, especially a low-expectation notice effect) is executed, the predetermined notice effect It is configured to be able to change and display the pending display mode in accordance with the advance notice effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even in the announcement performance with a low expectation of big win in the variation, the display mode of the suspension may be changed, so that the player's interest in the announcement performance can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible. In addition, when the degree of expectation for a big hit increases after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of Zako reservation with a medium degree of expectation for a big hit is continued, a battle production that is a production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Since it may spoil the interest of the (second half), even if there is no operation by the player, at the timing when the high-expectation production {this example, battle production (second half)} starts, the low-expectation production ( In this example, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the performance from being spoiled by hiding the non-significant hold). Also, the condition is that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub-input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period in which a predetermined effect {for example, battle reach (first half)} is being executed while the symbols are changing. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, so that it is possible to make it a player participation type production, and a player who does not want to know the variation of the expected degree of jackpot by the production can perform the predetermined operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which the selection is made such that the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image becomes an effect (for example, deletion of the pending digestion transmission image) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the modification example 3 from the second embodiment, the background change effect and the pending change effect are provided as the look-ahead effect, and only the hold change effect is executed multiple times during the execution of the look-ahead effect. is not limited, and the background change effect may be executed multiple times during execution of the look-ahead effect (for example, it may change to the "true angel zone background" even after changing to the "angel zone background"). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the more times it is executed), the higher the expectation of a big hit due to the fluctuation related to the prefetch effect being executed (rank It is desirable to configure it so that It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (rank up) during the execution of the pattern change related to the trigger suspension.

(Third embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to start and stop varying substantially at the same time as the main game symbols, but the variation mode of the decorative symbols is not limited to this. . Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as the third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, the second big winning hole C20 has a specific area C22 which is an area that triggers the transition to the probability varying gaming state by entering the ball.

First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) shows the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) and first main game lottery table MN11ta-B in the third embodiment. This is an example of the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). Differences from the present embodiment are that the probability of big wins in the probability variable gaming state is lowered, and that short-open big wins and long-open big wins are provided as big wins. Here, the short opening jackpot means that the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and a long open jackpot means that the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second big winning hole C20 is opened) during the big win. (eg, 30 seconds) is a jackpot that can be unlocked. In addition, in the third embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the above-described distribution game execution round, and the game property such as shifting to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game being executed is completed. It is (so-called ball confirmation machine).

Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to when losing and in the time reduction game state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "0". ” and “1 to 3” have different table contents. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbols selected in the time-reduced game state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are a long variation. Depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbols is a short variation or a long variation, the method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbols (especially the first decorative symbols) is configured to be different (details will be described later). . In addition, in the time shortening game state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (since the game is played by hitting to the right, only the pattern variation on the second main game side is executed. Alternatively, the variation of the second main game symbols is easier to execute than the variation of the first main game symbols).

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the time shortened game state, the variation time of the second decorative symbols is the same as the variation time of the second main game symbols. The variation time of the 2 decorative symbols is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of symbol variation (may differ depending on the number of reservations).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (because the game is progressed by hitting to the right, the second main game is played). Only the symbol variation on the game side is executed), and the first main game suspension basically does not occur. In the case of a short-time (for example, 3 seconds) variation time, only one type of content may be used, and in the case of a big hit, only one type of long-time (for example, 30 seconds) variation time may be included (time Since the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the shortened game state is an irregular symbol variation, there is no problem even if the content of the variation mode determination table has a simple configuration). In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the irregular pattern fluctuation, the contents of the variation mode determination table related to the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time-reduced gaming state are set for a short period of time regardless of the number of suspensions. is not selected (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or longer). It should be noted that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the probability variation gaming state by the number of times the main game pattern has changed (to the non-probability variation gaming state transfer). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1454 (third), at step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the probability variable number counter MP51c (decrements). Next, at step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1458 (third), at step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. It should be noted that even if No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process proceeds to step 1470 . In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, pattern variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is completed by the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST) Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, it is configured so that the probability variation game state does not end depending on the number of symbol variations (it can end when the special game is won), and the jackpot related to the first main game is configured. The ratio of the big hits related to the second main game to long open big wins is higher than the ratio of long open big wins, and the big wins related to the second main game also include short open big wins. good.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third) and step 1650 (third), that is, after the special game start display instruction command is set in step 1608, or When the special game execution flag is ON at step 1610, at step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the round currently being executed is a distribution game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, in this example, 2R and 4R). In the case of Yes at step 1611 (third), at step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes distribution game execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1634 . On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612 . Also, at step 1638, after setting the special game end display instruction command, at step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a game state determination process after the special game ends, which will be described later, and the following The processing (processing of step 1997) is started.

Next, FIG. 69 is a flow chart of distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is ON. If Yes in step 1702 , go to step 1716 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (7A, 4B, 5B and 7B, and the second main game jackpot symbols are all long open symbols). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 sets a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, An open pattern designed to make the ball entering the specific area C22 almost certain) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710 . In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 selects a short opening pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 seconds) as the opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 , and an open pattern designed such that the ball does not enter the specific area C22 is almost certain) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710 .

Next, at step 1710, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big winning opening C20 according to the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

Next, in step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have entered the second big winning hole C20. do. If Yes in step 1716 , go to step 1720 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes at step 1718 , go to step 1720 . Next, at step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big winning opening C20. Next, at step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes at step 1724, at step 1726, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. . Note that if step 1724 is No, the process also proceeds to step 1728 . Next, in step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634). Note that even if No in step 1718, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634).

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1662, at step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) to the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, at step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) to the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1672.

Next, at step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third). Then, the sub control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300, and in the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub control board S performs the time saving medium decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Execute and go to step 2400 .

Next, FIG. 72 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the design content determination permission flag in step 2204, The design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206, and in the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the first device during time saving, which will be described later. A drawing content determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2208 . It should be noted that the processing of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (there is no symbol content determination flag). In the third embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row, and the number of effective lines (lines that become effective by arranging the same number patterns) is one. It means a big hit if the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a loss). Also, in the left, middle, and right rows (or in the middle row), only number patterns can be stopped (temporarily stopped) (the above-mentioned "special patterns" do not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely low probability) and can be temporarily stopped during symbol fluctuation (or the probability of temporary stop is extremely low). In addition, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. If the number patterns are aligned, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it will be a loss). Also, in the left, middle and right rows (or in the middle row), only the number patterns can be stopped (temporarily stopped) (the above-mentioned "special patterns" do not stop), and during the pattern fluctuation It is configured to be temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving, according to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) of FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, at step 2802, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the first decorative design is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the second main game pending content (particularly, win/fail result and variation time) related to the symbol variation (main game symbol variation), and Confirm the content of the second main game pending (particularly variable time) in the order of completion of the first and second pieces, that is, the content of the second main game pending (particularly, win/fail result and variable time) excluding the third hold. . Next, at step 2806, the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not there is a suspension (including the design variation) with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) or more related to the confirmed suspension, and , Based on the digestion order of the suspension (including the design variation) that has a variation time of a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) or more, referring to the table for determining the first design variation mode during time saving, the first decorative design Determine the variation mode.

Here, the right part of the figure is an example of the table for determining the first layout variation mode during time saving in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (timing of step 2806), the second main game pending number, the second main game symbol variation and the second main game symbol The variable time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the variable time related to game suspension. In addition, as described above, among the variation modes of the second main game symbols, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and other than "b0 (1 second)" is a long variation.

Specifically, when there are two or more second main game reserves, it is determined whether or not there is a reserve with a long fluctuation in the pattern variation, the first reserve and the second reserve. , when there is no long fluctuation holding, the fluctuation time for 3 fluctuations of the second main game pattern becomes the fluctuation time of the first decoration pattern. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 3 and the number of second main game reservations maintains "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first one: 1 second, 2 Eye: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game holdings is maintained at “1 to 3” is, “the variation” and “ The total time of "first one" and "second one" is 3 seconds, and at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbols relating to the second hold stop changing, the first decorative symbols also stop. . Incidentally, the second decorative symbols are configured to stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbols stop varying in each variation.

On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game reserves, and if there is a long fluctuation reserve in any of the relevant pattern variation, the first reserve and the second reserve, the first The variation time until the variation of the main game symbols related to the reservation, which is a long variation in the order of execution, is the variation time of the first decorative symbols. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 3 and the number of second main game reservations maintains "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first one: 10 seconds, 2 Eye: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game holdings is maintained at “1 to 3” is, “the variation” and “ The first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbol related to the first hold, which is a long variation, stops fluctuating.

In addition, when the second main game hold is one or less, it is determined whether or not there is a long change hold until the hold that becomes the final order of execution (including the pattern change), and a long change is made. If there is no pending, the total variation time of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol and all suspensions becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 1 and the number of second main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "this fluctuation: 1 second, the first game: 1 second" , the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" is 2 seconds, which is the total of "the variation" and "1st symbol", and 1 symbol At the same time (or substantially at the same time) as when the main game symbols related to the holding of eyes stop changing, the first decorative symbols also stop.

On the other hand, if the second main game hold is 1 or less, and if there is a hold with a long fluctuation until the hold that becomes the final order of play (including the pattern fluctuation), the order of play that is the earliest. The variation time up to the variation of the main game symbols related to the long variation hold becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbols. For example, when the second main game hold is 1 and the change time when the number of second main game holds is maintained at "1 to 3" is "the change: 1 second, the first: 10 seconds" , the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" is 11 seconds, which is the total of "this fluctuation" and "first one", and is a long fluctuation At the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbols related to the first hold stop changing, the first decorative symbols also stop.

In the third embodiment, at the timing of step 2806, that is, at the timing after the consumption of the reservation, the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern is determined, but it is not limited to this, and the timing before the consumption of the reservation is determined. At the timing, the second main game pending information may be checked to determine the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol.

Next, at step 2808, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the hold information confirmed at step 2804, and determines whether or not there is a hold for a big hit in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the stop design of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design related to the holding of the big hit, and step 2810. 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2808, in step 2812, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the stop design of the first decorative design as the losing eye, and proceeds to step 2814. In addition, in the process of step 2812, the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern is set in the ready-to-win mode (the left and right row stop patterns are the same, for example, "4.6. 4") or a loose pattern (the stop symbols in the left and right columns are not the same, for example, "4, 6, 3"). Next, in step 2814, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the time saving first design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (step 2208 processing). Note that even if the answer to step 2802 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2208).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game mainly progresses on the second main game side (because the game progresses by hitting right, the second Since only the symbol variation on the main game side is executed), basically the first main game suspension does not occur, but the first main game suspension occurs when the player executes a left stroke. In that case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbols have the same variation time as the main game symbols until the variation related to the first main game suspension is completed.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flow chart of decorative design display control processing during time saving according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, at step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbols have started to change. In the case of Yes at step 2852, at step 2854, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2856, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if the result of step 2852 is No, the process proceeds to step 2858 as well.

Next, at step 2858, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2858, at step 2860, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, at step 2862, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first decorative design is stopped. In the case of Yes at step 2862, at step 2864, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the variable display of the first decorative design, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2862, in step 2865, the decorative design display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative design, and proceeds to step 2866.

Next, at step 2866, the decorative design display control means SM21 variably displays the second decorative design. Next, at step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image display such as temporary stop display, notice image display, ready-to-win image display, etc. related to the variation of the main game symbol that has been determined. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols can be temporarily stopped and displayed in the time-reduced game state, but are configured not to be temporarily stopped in the stop modes such as "special symbols" and pseudo continuous symbols. In addition, as a specific example of temporary stop, the first decorative pattern is reach (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped in the pattern fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more). It may be configured such that the second decorative design is temporarily stopped during the period when the first decorative design is ready, or the first decorative design is temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous change before the first decorative design becomes a reach. .

Next, at step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbols have stopped. In the case of Yes at step 2870, at step 2872, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative design has come. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms and displays the first decorative design. Next, at step 2876, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative design display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative design, and proceeds to step 2880.

Next, at step 2880, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms and displays the second decorative design. Next, at step 2882, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Note that even if No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Here, the upper part of the same figure is a decorative design variation image diagram during time saving, and illustrates an example of the action related to the variation of the decorative design in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol variation start state" means that the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start to vary at the timing when the main game symbol (especially the second main game symbol) starts to vary. or not. Incidentally, the hatched portion indicates that the decorative design (first decorative design) is in the process of changing. It also displays whether or not the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) stop varying at the timing when the main game symbols (particularly, the second main game symbols) stop varying. Incidentally, the hatched portion indicates that the decorative design (first decorative design) is in the process of changing. In this way, the second decorative symbols start and stop varying at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the variation of the main game symbols (especially, the second main game symbols) (in accordance with the variation of the main game symbols). On the other hand, the second decorative symbols are configured to start and stop varying every three times the main game symbols (particularly, the second main game symbols) vary. In other words, the first decorative symbols are configured so that one symbol variation can be executed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game symbols (and the second decorative symbols).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, by determining the variation time of the first decorative symbol based on the number of suspensions and the variation time of the second main game suspension, By configuring the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern to be the value of the plural times of fluctuation time of the second main game pattern, the game is played as if the plural fluctuations of the main game patterns were one fluctuation. As in the third embodiment, even if the number of fluctuations of the main game symbols, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation gaming state, is large (200 in this example), the number of fluctuations is small (200 in this example). For example, 100 times) can be shown to the player, and it is possible to reduce that the progress of the game becomes boring due to continuous loss fluctuations during the probability fluctuation game state, and the probability fluctuation game It can be made to feel that the probability of a big hit in the state is higher than it actually is.

In the third embodiment, the second decorative symbol can be confirmed and stopped three times during the period in which the first decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped once. The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the second main game hold upper limit number of 4 times (if the second main game hold upper limit number is exceeded, the first decorative symbol will (because a situation may occur in which the second main game hold is completely consumed).

In addition, the board structure of the third embodiment may be changed, for example, the game ball almost certainly passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10 when hitting to the right. Arranged so as to overlap vertically on the route (the auxiliary game start opening H10 is arranged on the upper side as seen from the player), and almost all of the game balls that flow down the route and pass through the auxiliary game start opening H10 It may be configured so that the ball can enter the second main game start opening B10. In the case of such a configuration, in the time shortening game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 to when it enters the second main game start port B10, "the auxiliary game symbol Since it is desirable to be able to: start of fluctuation → end of fluctuation of auxiliary game symbols → open the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d”, “the auxiliary game pattern fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, the second main game start electric It is preferable to configure the opening mode of the accessory B11d to be "open for 6 seconds→close". In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from entering the second main game start port B10 when hitting to the right in the time shortening game state, the second main game It is desirable to set the number of prize balls at the starting port B10 to 1 ball (the number of prize balls at the first main game starting port A10 is 3 balls).

In addition, in the third embodiment, while the first decorative symbol is stopped, the content of the second main game reserve is confirmed, and the fluctuation time for the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. In the case where the holding of the main game symbols with a long variation exists before the second execution order, the first decorative symbols are also stopped at the same time when the pattern variation related to the holding of the long variation is stopped. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first decorative design may not depend on the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative design. The variation time of the decorative pattern is configured to be different.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game reserves, and any of the pattern fluctuation, the first reserve, and the second reserve, a long fluctuation When there is a hold, the fluctuation time until the change of the main game pattern related to the hold that becomes the long fluctuation of the first order of execution is the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern. If there is no long variation in any of the symbol variation, the first retained symbol, and the second retained symbol, the variation time for the three variations of the second main game symbol is the variation of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 3 and the number of second main game reservations is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second , 1st piece: 1 second, 2nd piece: 1 second, 3rd piece: 1 second”, the number of 1st decorative symbols when the number of second main game holdings maintains “1 to 3 pieces” The variation time is scheduled to be 3 seconds, which is the total of ``this variation'', ``1st piece'', and ``2nd piece'', but the second main game hold is not maintained at ``1 to 3'', For example, if the actual variation time is "the variation: 1 second, the first one: 1 second, the second one: 5 seconds", the variation time of the first decorative pattern is "the variation" and " A total of 7 seconds for "1st piece" and "2nd piece", and the variation time of the first decorative pattern can be different depending on whether or not there is an additional pending occurrence.

In addition, in the third embodiment, while the first decorative symbol is stopped, the content of the second main game reserve is confirmed, and the fluctuation time for the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. During the stop, the effect related to the first decorative pattern may be determined, for example, when "lightning running effect" is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of fluctuation in a certain first decorative pattern variation. Then, during the suspension of the first decorative symbol variation, confirm the subsequent variation of the second decorative symbol (or the variation of the second main game symbol), and in the next first decorative symbol variation, "lightning It may be determined whether or not to re-execute the "running effect". It should be noted that the more the "lightning running effect" continues, the higher the expectation of a big hit in the first decorative pattern variation (or the main game pattern variation included in the first decorative pattern variation) related to the effect. It is desirable to configure it to be high. The timing of confirming the variation of the second decorative symbols (or the variation of the second main game symbols) may be changed. In contrast to the fact that only the contents of the fluctuation related to the second main game hold can be confirmed, if the confirmation is made at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or the timing of the end of the fluctuation, the second that occurred during the period during which the first decorative pattern is fluctuating Since it is possible to confirm the contents of the change in the second main game hold, it is desirable that the confirmation timing is after the end of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed in detail on the effect display device, but such a configuration can be applied to the above-described implementation. It is not limited to only morphological configurations. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a right-handed instruction display indicating that a right-handed shot should be performed in a game situation in which a right-handed shot (a shooting mode in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the board surface) is to be performed. It has a right-handed display control means SM27 that controls the display of.

First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when execution of (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM, is started, in step 3400 (fourth), The sub-control board S executes right-handed instruction display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100 .

Next, FIG. 76 is a flow chart of right-handed hitting instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) of FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In this example, it is determined whether or not the time shortening gaming state in step 3402, but it is not limited to this, whether or not the gaming state should be executed to the right (for example, probability variation game state, probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, etc.) may be determined. If Yes in step 3402 , the process proceeds to step 3406 .

In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. If Yes at step 3404, at step 3406, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command to display a right-handed instruction display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (step 2100). Here, the upper right part of the same figure is a display image diagram of the instruction display for hitting to the right. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG, and is configured to notify the player that the game should be played right-handed at present. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit to the right, the indication of hitting to the right is configured to have a higher display priority (details will be described later). In addition, the display basically displayed on the constant effect display device SG, such as the second decorative pattern and the reserved display (including the first reserved display and the second reserved display), which will be described later, is not the right-handed instruction display. You may configure so that they do not overlap.

In addition, the right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (such as when a special game is being executed and when a special game is not being executed) is different. It may be configured so that the display mode can be different (for example, the size is different) depending on the state or situation. In addition, when the display mode is configured to be different, for example, during the big win, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be configured to be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning hole. A right-handed instruction display during a big win in which all opening modes are long open is a relatively large first display pattern, and a right-handed instruction display during a big win in which all the opening modes of the big prize openings are short open is relatively small. As a second display pattern, the right-handed instruction display during a big win in which long opening and short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the big winning opening is relatively large in the round in which the big winning opening is long open. Therefore, in the round in which the big prize opening is short-open, the player may progress while switching the right-handed instruction display so that the second display pattern is relatively small.

In addition, in the case where the first right-handed instruction display with a relatively small display area and the second right-handed instruction display with a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, the following is performed. may be configured.
(1) In a situation in which a player should hit to the right (for example, a time-reduced game state), the first right-handed instruction display is displayed, and in the situation in which the player should hit to the right, the game is played to indicate that the player is hitting to the left. When the machine detects (for example, in the time shortened game state, when three game balls enter the first main game start opening A10 that can be entered by hitting left), the second right hitting instruction display is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handed instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-handed instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Further, the display area for the first hitting to right instruction display and the display area for the second hitting to right instruction display do not overlap. It should be noted that the display area for the first hitting to right instruction display and the display area for the second hitting to right instruction display may be configured to overlap. The display priority of the first hitting-to-right instruction display may be higher than the degree.
(3) The display priority in the effect display device SG is "first right-handed instruction display → second right-handed instruction display → notice effect → fluctuating decorative pattern"("second right-handed Instruction display → first right-handed instruction display → notice effect → changing decorative pattern"), for example, when the display area of the second right-handed instruction display and the display area of the changing decorative pattern overlap , the second right-handed instruction display is displayed on the front (becomes visible).
(4) The first right-handed instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during variation during the auxiliary game state {during special symbol variation (during first decorative symbol variation, second decorative symbol variation)}. (For example, when a "symbol enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged occurs), it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol. However, the first right-handed instruction display does not overlap with any of the first decorative design and the second decorative design during the fluctuation stop. Also, the first right-handed instruction display is the first reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87), or the second reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Furthermore, the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with a predetermined advance notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}, but a specific notice effect {for example, a speech notice Notice to be displayed)} does not overlap.
(5) The second right-handed instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during the variation during the auxiliary game state {during special symbol variation (during first decorative symbol variation, second decorative symbol variation)}. (For example, not only when the "symbol enlargement effect" occurs in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged, but also during scrolling from top to bottom), It does not overlap with the second decorative design. In addition, the second right-handed instruction display is the first reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) or the second reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Further, the second right-handed instruction display includes a predetermined announcement effect {for example, a group announcement (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific announcement effect {for example, a speech announcement (a notice to display a character's speech)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative symbol is in the process of special symbol variation (during the first decorative symbol variation, during the second decorative symbol variation), the first pending display (for example, (See FIG. 87) and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see FIG. 87, for example). Furthermore, when the first decorative pattern is in the process of special pattern fluctuation (+during the first decorative pattern fluctuation), a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example , speech announcement (an announcement that displays the character's speech)}.
(7) When the second decorative symbol is in the process of special symbol fluctuation (during the first decorative pattern fluctuation, during the second decorative (See FIG. 87) and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87). Furthermore, when the second decorative pattern is in the process of special pattern fluctuation (+during the second decorative pattern fluctuation), it may overlap with a predetermined advance notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. does not overlap with the announcement effect {for example, announcement of dialogue (prediction of displaying character's dialogue)}.
(8) The first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with the predetermined notice effect {for example, the group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific announcement effect {for example, a speech announcement (an announcement displaying a character's speech)}.
(9) The second pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with the predetermined notice effect {for example, the group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific announcement effect {for example, a speech announcement (an announcement displaying a character's speech)}.

Further, in the case where the display mode of the right-handed instruction display can be changed depending on the game state or situation, the following configuration may be used.
(1) During execution of a small hit, the right-handed instruction display is displayed in a relatively small size (for example, one arrow), which is different from when no small win is being executed.
(2) A probability variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state when the special game is not being executed, a non-probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state when the special game is not being executed, and a case where the special game is being executed is in the non-time-reduction gaming state.
(3) As the time shortening gaming state, there are a non-probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state and a probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state.
(4) When the special game is not being executed, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed in the non-probability-variable gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state and the probability-variable gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state. On the other hand, during the execution of the special game, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display prompting left-handed player is not displayed).
(5) In the time shortening game state, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a left-handed player's instruction is not displayed).
(6) In the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state, if the above-described first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display can be displayed, the non-time-reduced game state The display mode of the first hitting to right instruction display is different between the and the time shortening game state, but the display mode of the second hitting to right instruction display is the same.
(7) The display prompting left-handed is for a predetermined period (for example, after the situation changes from right-handed to left-handed, for a predetermined period, and in the left-handed situation, an auxiliary game start opening that makes it easy to enter the ball when executing right-handed. is displayed for a predetermined period from the detection of right-handed hitting, such as when a game ball enters the ball (becomes hidden after a predetermined period of time), while the right-handed instruction display is in a situation where right-handed hitting is required The period in which the display is always displayed or the indication for hitting to the right is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

If No at step 3404, at step 3408, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command to erase the right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next process (step 2100). Incidentally, in step 3408, if the indication of hitting to the right is not displayed, the processing is not executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of the decorative design in the fourth embodiment. This figure illustrates how the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are displayed and displayed depending on the combination of the game state and the background effect. In addition, all four display examples shown in FIG. ing. First, the upper left part of the figure illustrates a case where the game state is the non-variable probability game state and the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers arranged in a horizontal line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the game state is the probability variation game state, and the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Chinese numerals, and the display positions are three numbers arranged in a convex shape. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Further, when the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" in both cases of "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" both in the case of "777" and in the case of "777".

Next, in the lower left part of the figure, the game state is the non-variable probability game state, and the background effect being executed is the "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers arranged in a diagonal line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, the game state is the probability varying game state, and the background effect being executed is the "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Chinese numerals, and the display position is a row of three numerals in a concave shape. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Further, when the background effect being executed is "night stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" in both cases of "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" both in the case of "777" and in the case of "777".

Thus, in the same figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative symbol differs depending on the game state.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol differs depending on the game state.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative symbols does not differ even if the game state differs.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the game state differs.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects are different.
is configured as

In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect or the game state, as shown in FIG. In the case of a configuration in which the display mode is a combination of the above, the display mode of the first decorative pattern may be different by making the pattern different (for numbers, Chinese numerals and Arabic numerals may be used. may be different or may be the same). Also, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the pattern is attached. In addition, as a configuration that can suggest the game state after the end of the big win when the big win is achieved by the display color of the numbers of the decorative patterns, the big win is started by aligning three numbers whose display color is green. In such a case, it is not certain whether or not the probability variable gaming state will occur after the end of the big win. It may be configured so that it is almost certain that it will be in the probability varying gaming state. For example, in the non-probability varying gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red, while in the probability varying gaming state may be configured such that "3" and "7" are red ("3" has the same property as "7" in the probability variation game state). Also, as a difference in nature between green and red, when a big win is started by stopping the green decorative pattern, a big win with 8 rounds (or 8 rounds or more) is started. In other words, when the red decorative pattern is stopped and the big win is started, the number of execution rounds may be configured to start 16 rounds, or the green decorative pattern becomes the reach. In this case, the ratio of the pattern variation to be a big hit is 10%, while when the red decorative pattern is a reach, the ratio of the pattern variation to be a big hit is 50%. good. In addition, when "1" results in a reach, the ratio of the pattern variation to a big hit is 10%, while when "7" results in a reach, the percentage of the pattern variation to a big hit. It may be configured to be 50%. In addition, when the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect or the game state, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the number of the first decorative pattern is accompanied by a letter. For example, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the character "SUPER" is not attached to the first decorative symbol "7", while in the probability fluctuation gaming state, the first decorative symbol "7" ” may be accompanied by the characters “SUPER”. Also, in the case of a big hit in the first main game pattern (especially in the non-time-reduced game state), the character "SUPER" is not attached to "7", and the big hit in the second main game pattern (especially in the time-reduced game state) ), the character “SUPER” is attached to “7”, or the character “SUPER” is attached to “7” in a big hit in the first main game pattern (especially during a non-time-reduced game state) , the probability that the character "SUPER" will accompany "7" in the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially during the time-reduced game state) may be increased. Furthermore, when the character "SUPER" is accompanied, the 16R jackpot is confirmed (the configuration may be such that the 16R probability variable hit is confirmed), but when the character "SUPER" is not accompanied, the 16R jackpot is confirmed. is not determined (16R probability variable hit may not be determined) or 4R jackpot is determined. It should be noted that the character "SUPER" can be attached to the first decorative design, but the character "SUPER" is not necessarily attached to the second decorative design. Further, the first decorative symbols other than "7" (especially, the even-numbered designs) are configured so that the characters "SUPER" are not attached even if they are the first decorative symbols.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of the decorative design in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the area in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed on the effect display device SG is illustrated. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left part of the figure, the first decorative design is variably displayed around the center of the display area SG10, and the second decorative design is variably displayed around the upper left part of the display area SG10. configured to be As for the range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative patterns can be displayed in consideration of whether the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed or the jackpot is being executed, the second decorative pattern is the range shown in the upper right part of the figure, and the first decorative pattern. is in the range shown in the bottom right of the illustration. As illustrated, in the fourth embodiment, the area in which the first decorative design can be displayed is larger than the area in which the second decorative design can be displayed. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, while the display of the second decorative pattern does not move during the variable display, the display of the first decorative pattern moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10 ), the movement range of the first decorative design is larger than the movement range of the second decorative design.

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed is illustrated. First, in the upper left part of the figure, since the main game symbols are being varied, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are variably displayed. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are ready-to-win display. Next, in the lower left part of the figure, a battle effect is executed as an SP reach effect, and during the execution of the battle effect, it is desired to make the player pay attention to the battle effect (whether the result of the battle effect will be a big hit or not). ), the display of the first decorative pattern is erased (becomes non-display). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern is continuously displayed as the ready-to-win display, and if the player wants to check the status of the decorative pattern during the battle production, he/she can confirm the ready-to-win state by visually recognizing the display of the second decorative pattern. You can recognize that you are inside. After that, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stop-displayed as the jackpot pattern. Thus, while the main game symbols are fluctuating, the display of the first decorative symbols is erased (while the battle effect is being executed), while the second decorative symbols are always displayed. The display period of the second decorative design is relatively longer than the display period of the design. It should be noted that the second decorative design may be configured not to be the ready-to-win display even when the first decorative design is to be the ready-to-win display. Further, even when the first decorative symbol is performing the above-described pseudo-continuous variation, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to perform the pseudo-continuous variation. In addition, the second decorative design may not always be displayed. For example, the second decorative design may be hidden while the first decorative design is displayed, or the display area SG10 may be covered as a specific effect. When such an effect with a large display area is executed, the second decorative pattern may be hidden (difficult to see).

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to the decorative design to be used in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to 4th Embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbols are fluctuating, and the first and second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is completed, and the big hit pattern "7A" is stopped as the stop pattern of the first main game pattern, so that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped as big hit patterns. will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative symbols use Arabic numerals, which are symbols common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Also, as the second decorative symbols, Arabic numerals are used when the first main game symbols fluctuate, and when "7A" stops, "777" stops.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbols are fluctuating, and the first and second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the variation of the second main game symbols is completed, and the big hit symbol "7B" is stopped as the stop symbol of the second main game symbols, so that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are stopped as big winning symbols. will be displayed. As for the first decorative pattern, "777" is stopped. On the other hand, the second decorative symbols are configured such that when the second main game symbols fluctuate, alphabets are used, and when "7B" stops, "AAA" stops. Thus, in the first decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbols are changed and the symbols used when the second main game symbols are changed are the same (the display area of the symbols and the design of the symbols are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbols fluctuate differ from the symbols used when the second main game symbols fluctuate (the designs of the symbols to be displayed fluctuatingly and stopped are different). is doing). Incidentally, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be displayed on the same display device, or may be displayed on different display devices. Also, the first pending display and the second pending display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device, or may be displayed on different display devices. In addition, when displaying on different display devices for both the decorative pattern and the reserved display, each display device may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices), or a liquid crystal display device may be used. It is good also as a device and an LED lamp.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to the stationary display mode of the decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that, similarly to FIG. 80, FIG. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbols are fluctuating, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is completed, and the big hit pattern "7A" is stopped as the stop pattern of the first main game pattern, so that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped as big hit patterns. will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative symbols use Arabic numerals, which are symbols common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Also, the second decorative pattern uses Arabic numerals, and "777" is stopped.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbols are fluctuating at a timing different from that in the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. After that, the variation of the first main game pattern is completed, and the jackpot pattern "7A" (the same jackpot pattern as in the upper part of the figure) is stopped as the stop pattern of the first main game pattern. The second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the big hit pattern. The first decorative design has the Arabic numeral "333" stopped, and the second decorative design has the Arabic numeral "777" stopped. In this way, even when the main game symbols have the same stop symbol, the first decorative symbol has a plurality of types of stop display modes ("777", "333", etc.), while the second decorative symbol is , when the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, there is only one type of stop display mode ("777"). As a specific example of the candidates for the stop display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, first, the stop display mode of the first decorative design is a stop display mode suggesting a 16R jackpot. are "333" and "777", and in the case of a stop display mode suggesting an 8R (or 8R or more) jackpot, they are "111" and "555", and 4R (or 4R or more) "222", "444", "666" and "888" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting a big win of . In addition, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "333" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting a 16R jackpot, and a stop suggesting an 8R (or 8R or more) jackpot. In the display mode, only "111" is displayed, and in the stop display mode, which suggests a 4R (or 4R or more) jackpot, only "222" is displayed. In addition, as another specific example, a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol that suggests transitioning to the probability varying gaming state after the end of the big hit (the transition to the probability varying gaming state is almost certain) is , ``111'', ``333'', ``555'' and ``777'', which does not suggest transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot is completed (it is not definite to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state). Candidates for the decorative pattern stop display mode are "222", "444", "666" and "888". In addition, the candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol suggesting transition to the probability varying gaming state after the jackpot is completed (the transition to the probability varying gaming state is almost certain) is only "111". A candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern that does not suggest shifting to the probability varying game state after the big win (it is not definite that the state shifts to the probability varying gaming state) is only ``222''.

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, with those with high display priority shown in the upper row and those with low display priority shown in the lower row. In addition, when the display content with a high display priority and the display content with a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right-handed instruction display and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner , regarding the display of the overlapping part, the right-handed instruction display with high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative pattern with low display priority is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (hidden by the display of the right-handed instruction display and becomes invisible). The display priority in this example is, from the highest to the highest, "error display->right-handed instruction display->power saving display->second decorative design->notice effect->first decorative design->suspension display". Although the display priority may be changed, the display priority is changed for "error display", "right-handed instruction display", and "power saving display" because they greatly affect the profit of the player. is not desirable. Further, the order of display priority may be changed between the advance notice effect, the first decorative pattern and the reserved display, but the display priority of any of the advance notice effect, the first decorative pattern and the reserved display is the display of the second decorative pattern. It is preferable to configure it to be lower than the priority. In addition, it is desirable to display the "right-handed instruction display" in a position that is not hidden by other display objects (including character YK, etc.), and the display content with a higher priority than the "right-handed instruction display" has been newly added. In such a case, it is preferable that the area in which the newly provided display content is displayed does not overlap with the area in which the "right-handed instruction display" is displayed. Further, the "power saving display" is configured not to be displayed during execution of the symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 7 illustrates a configuration related to a display mode of decorative patterns applicable to the fourth embodiment, and has a configuration different from that of FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and under the condition that the first and second decorative symbols are fluctuating, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (the game state is It is in a time shortened game state, and in the time shortened game state, it has a game property in which the game progresses by hitting to the right). After that, the area where the first decorative pattern is variably displayed overlaps the area where the right-handed instruction display is displayed, and since the right-handed instruction display has a higher priority, it is displayed on the front. In addition, the display areas of the second decorative pattern and the indication of hitting to the right are configured so as not to overlap each other.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbols are fluctuating, and while the first and second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed, a flock of sheep appears as an announcement effect. The display area of the notice effect overlaps both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the priority is "second decorative pattern > notice effect > first decorative pattern", so the sheep is displayed. and the first decorative pattern are overlapped, the display of the sheep is displayed in front, and when the display of the sheep and the second decorative pattern are overlapped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the front. Become. It should be noted that, as in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, which will be described later, when there are a plurality of holding display areas on the effect display device SG (holding display on the first main game side and holding display on the second main game side display exists, the first reserved display and the second reserved display exist, etc.), a new reserved display area SG10 is provided at the lower left of the display area SG10 in the figure (not shown). The holding display in the upper right part of the display area SG10 is set as the first holding display, and the newly provided holding display is set as the second holding display, etc.). good.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device SG, To provide a user-friendly game machine in which a player can check the status of decorative patterns even when he/she wants to check the situation by configuring the second decorative patterns to be displayed even when the first decorative patterns are erased. In addition, even when the player wants to show the performance such as the SP ready-to-play performance, the display of the first decorative pattern can be erased to make the performance to be shown more conspicuous. Further, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative design to be higher than that of the first decorative design, when the first decorative design is hidden and the status of the decorative design is desired to be checked, the second decorative design can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to configure so that the situation in which the image becomes invisible is unlikely to occur.

In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative pattern may be displayed as a combination of three patterns, while the second decorative pattern may be displayed as one pattern. In addition, there are four types of stop display modes for one symbol in the first decorative design, two types of stop display modes for one symbol in the second decorative design, and so on. The number of types of display modes may be greater than the number of types of stop display modes for one symbol of the second decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the probability that the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern (the display mode of the combination of three patterns) is continuously the same over a predetermined number of pattern fluctuations is lower than that of the second decorative pattern. It can be constructed so that the probability that the stop display mode will be the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol variations is higher. In addition, two display areas of "○" and "×" are provided as the display area of the second decorative pattern, and when the pattern variation is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) pattern, the "○" is lit. It may be configured so that "x" is lit and displayed when the symbol variation is lost. In such a configuration, the display of the second decorative pattern does not move on the display area SG10, but blinks "o" or "x" to notify that the pattern is changing. may be configured as follows. In addition, as the display area for the second decorative symbols, two display areas, an area in the shape of "○" and an area in the shape of "☆", are provided. , and when the second main game pattern fluctuates, the variable display and stop display are performed in the "☆" shaped area, and "○" or The blinking of "☆" notifies that the pattern is changing, and when the pattern change is stop-displayed as a big win (or small win), the symbol "○" or "☆" is lighted and displayed. When the variation is stopped and displayed in the missing pattern, it may be configured so that "○" or "☆" is extinguished and displayed. The pattern used when the game pattern changes and the pattern used when the second main game pattern changes are the same (the display area of the pattern and the design of the pattern are the same, and the player only visually recognizes the first decorative pattern). Then, it is difficult to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol, for example, "777"). In addition, in the second decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbols are varied are different from the symbols used when the second main game symbols are varied (areas for variable display and stop display are different). (The design of the symbols for variable display and static display are different). Further, as described above, in the case where two display areas are provided as the display areas for the second decorative symbols, the area in the shape of "○" and the area in the shape of "☆", the first main game symbol is When the big win (or small win) pattern is stopped and displayed, "○" is lighted and displayed, and when the second main game pattern is stopped and displayed with the big win (or small win) pattern, "☆" is displayed. When the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols, "○" is turned off and displayed, and when the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols, "☆" is displayed. When the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol that is the big win (or the small win) symbol, the symbol "333" is displayed. ” and “777” can be stopped and displayed in a plurality of types of stop display modes. 761” or the like. With such a configuration, the number of kinds of stop display modes of the second decorative symbols is stopped when the main game symbols (first main game symbols or second main game symbols) become a big win (or a small win). There is only one type of stop display mode that can be obtained, and only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game pattern (first main game pattern or second main game pattern) is lost, while the first decoration As for the number of types of stop display modes of symbols, there are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a big win (or a small win), and There are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when a game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed in detail on the effect display device, but such a configuration can be applied to the above-described implementation. It is not limited to only morphological configurations. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modified Example 1 from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth modification 1). In 1), the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400 .

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 84 in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (fourth modification 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth modification 1). After the information is temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area, at step 2116, after the design content determination permission flag is turned on by the design reservation information display control means SM22, or at step 2111, the design reservation information display control means SM22 does not receive the pattern variation display start instruction command from the main side, in step 2118-1 (fourth variant 1), the binding pending information display control means SM22 sets the binding pending counter value as the first pending display. The same number of pending images (lamp-shaped pending display on the effect display device SG) are lit and displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (fourth variation 1), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 displays the binding reservation counter value as a second reservation display on the effect display device SG in numerical value, and then The processing (processing of step 2200) is started. In addition, the display mode of the second pending display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking of an LED lamp different from the display on the effect display device SG. It is sufficient that the pending display and the second pending display are different.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative design display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth modification 1) of FIG. 84 in modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, at step 3502, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 3502, at step 3504, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 3506, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 3508, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the design variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. It should be noted that even if No in step 3502 , the process proceeds to step 3510 .

Next, at step 3510, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 3510, at step 3512, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 3514, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the decorative design. Determine whether or not it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , go to step 3526 .

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3514, at step 3518, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs decoration based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3518, at step 3520, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 3526 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM24b). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3522, at step 3524, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3526 . It should be noted that even if No in step 3522 , the process proceeds to step 3526 .

Next, at step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game symbol is displayed from the main control board M side). determines whether or not information indicating that the symbol is to be stopped is received). In the case of Yes at step 3526, at step 3528, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). be done). Next, at step 3530, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 3532, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). do. Note that even if No in step 3510 or step 3526, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in pending display in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left part of the figure, a first pending display and a second pending display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side, respectively, are displayed. Incidentally, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Also, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are stopped and displayed. After that, the hold on the first main game side is canceled and the next symbol change starts, so that the first hold display related to the first main game side and the second hold display related to the first main game side change. (The display changes from the indication that the number of pending coins on the first main game side is two to the indication that it is one). After that, with the same pattern fluctuation, a hold on the first main game side occurs (a game ball enters the first main game start port A10), and the number of holds on the first main game side changes. The 1st pending display on the 1st main game side and the 2nd pending display on the 1st main game side change (change from the display that the number of pending on the 1st main game side is 1 to 2) do). In this way, the first pending display and the second pending display are displayed at the pending digestion timing when the pattern variation is started and the pending occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start port. is configured to change.

Next, in the left middle row, a first pending display and a second pending display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side, respectively, are displayed. The number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are variably displayed. After that, during the same change, a pending change effect (a effect in which the display mode of the pending can change) is executed as a pending look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the effect mode of the hold change effect shown in FIG. It is a production that incites whether or not. Thereafter, as a result of the pending change effect, the first pending display on the first main game side changes, while the second pending display on the first main game side does not change. In this way, only the first pending display can change when the pending prefetch effect is executed, and the second pending display is configured not to change. It should be noted that even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side may change, while the second hold display on the second main game side may change. configured not to change. It should be noted that the pending prefetch effect is executed by the process exemplified in the above-described second embodiment and the like.

As shown in the figure, the features of the first pending display and the second pending display are as follows:
(1) When the pending number is the same, the display mode of the first pending display can change, while the display mode of the second pending display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first pending display can change without an increase or decrease in the pending number (consumption of pending or occurrence of pending), while the display mode of the second pending display does not change without an increase or decrease in the pending number.
(3) When an action is executed on the display related to the suspension as the suspension change effect and the performance of changing the display mode of the suspension is executed, the suspension display to be the target of the performance is the first suspension display, The suspension change effect is not executed for the second suspension display.
It is configured as described above.

Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each game state in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the presence or absence of the display of the first pending display and the second pending display in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, applicable in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, and the display mode are shown. An example configuration is shown. First, in <<Example 1>> in the upper part of the figure, the first pending display and the second pending display are displayed in both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state. The display mode of the first pending display is different between the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state (the first pending display related to the first main game side and the first pending display related to the second main game side are different). In <<Example 1>> in the upper part of the figure, the first holding display corresponding to the holding of the first main game side, the first holding display corresponding to the holding of the second main game side, and the first holding display corresponding to the holding of the second main game side A second hold display corresponding to the hold of and a second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side are displayed, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side, Neither the first pending display (area where the first pending display is displayed) nor the second pending display (area where the second pending display is displayed) is shared.

Next, in <<Example 2>> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first holding display on the first main game side, the first holding display on the second main game side, and the first main game A second pending display on the side and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. In addition, in the time shortening game state, a first pending display on the second main game side, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, a right-hand shot is executed in the time-reduced game state, and the second main game symbol is varied (the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10) to progress the game. In the case of pachinko gaming machines (particularly in the case of a gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is prioritized over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is Since it is not so important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be configured to be hidden. Also, even in such a configuration, if the player is not able to recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side, it is not user-friendly, so the second reservation display on the first main game side is displayed. is configured as follows.

Next, in <<Example 3>> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first holding display on the first main game side, the second holding display on the first main game side, and the second main game is displayed, and the first pending display of the second main game side is not displayed. In addition, in the time shortening game state, a first pending display on the second main game side, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, a right-hand shot is executed in the time-reduced game state, and the second main game symbol is varied (the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10) to progress the game. In the case of pachinko gaming machines (particularly in the case of a gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is prioritized over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be configured to be hidden. In addition, in a non-time-reduced game state, a left-handed stroke is executed, and the first main game pattern is changed (a game ball is entered into the first main game start port A10) to progress the game. In the case of a pachinko game machine (especially when the second main game start port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that has been hit left), the hold on the second main game side is not very important for the player. , the first pending display on the second main game side may be configured to be hidden. It should be noted that, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second pending display on the side and the second pending display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In addition, in the same figure, although the configuration related to the presence or absence of the hold display is different between the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, it is not limited to this, and the non-probability variation gaming state and the probability variation The configuration related to the presence or absence of the pending display may be different from the game state, and the configuration related to the presence or absence of the pending display may be different due to the difference in the production mode. In addition, the display mode of the first pending display is different due to the difference in the game state shown in <<Example 1>> above, but the display mode of the second pending display is not different. 3>> is also applicable. As described above in <<Example 1>><<Example2>><<Example3>>,
(1) When the game state is different (for example, between the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state, or between the non-probability variable game state and the probability variable game state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the display mode of the first pending display is different, but the display mode of the second pending display is the same.
(2) If the production mode is different (for example, between the daytime stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that the pending prefetch production is being executed and a stage other than the prescribed production stage or according to one of a plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the display mode of the first suspension display is different, but the display mode of the second suspension display is the same.
(3) When the game state is different (for example, between the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, or between the non-probability fluctuation game state and the probability fluctuation game state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the presence or absence of display of the first pending display is different, but the second pending display is always displayed regardless of the game state (however, priority is given to the pending display such as the special game state or the error state). (It is possible that neither the first pending display nor the second pending display is displayed when there is information to be displayed.)
(4) If the production mode is different (for example, between the daytime stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that the pending prefetch production is being executed and a stage other than the prescribed production stage or according to one of a plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the presence or absence of display of the first pending display is different, but regardless of which production mode is the second pending display is always displayed (However, in a display mode such as a demo screen display or an error display that has information to be displayed with priority over the pending display, it is assumed that neither the first pending display nor the second pending display is displayed. can also be used).
It has characteristics such as It should be noted that the above features are applicable to both the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to erasure of the pending display in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, a first pending display and a second pending display corresponding respectively to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Also, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are variably displayed. After that, the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win display with the same variation, and after that, the battle presentation is executed as the SP ready-to-win presentation with the same variation. During the execution of the battle effect, the first pending display is erased (hidden) for both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second pending display is displayed for the first main game side and the second main game side. Any display on the second main game side continues to be displayed. Thus, in the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the pattern variation being executed will result in a big hit. It is configured to erase the first pending display in order to occupy (using most of the area of the display area SG10) and execute the battle effect. In addition, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second pending display on the side and the second pending display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In the same figure, when the SP reach is executed, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is not displayed, but the second Although the pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is illustrated as being displayed, it is not limited to this, and during the big hit (some period or all the time), the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display (the second The second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) may remain displayed. In addition, at the time of execution of SP reach, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display (the first The second pending display on the main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) remain displayed may be always applied during the execution period of SP reach, or in the execution period of SP reach May be applied to some periods.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, two pending displays, the first pending display and the second pending display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first suspension display, the display mode is changed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit related to suspension, or the display is erased when the player wants to pay attention to the SP reach effect. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by setting the display mode (whether or not to display) according to the situation and by using it as a part of the effect suggesting a big hit or the like. In addition, the second pending display is always displayed and the display mode is configured not to change, so that when the player wants to check the current pending number, the pending number can be recognized without causing any doubt. is configured as follows.

Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment may be configured to display a pending digestion transfer image as exemplified in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. In such a configuration, the pending digestive transfer image corresponding to the first pending display may be displayed, and the pending digestive transfer image corresponding to the second pending display may not be displayed. The reserved display corresponding to the first reserved display is a display mode in which the reserved display mode is the same as or similar to the first reserved display. For example, the first reserved display is a display in the shape of "○". And, when it is displayed in one of the display colors "red", "green", "blue", and "white", the pending digestion transmission image corresponding to the first pending display is also "○ , and the display color is one of "red", "green", "blue", and "white". In addition, the display mode of the first suspension display immediately before the suspension on the main game side corresponding to the first suspension display is terminated, and the display mode is displayed immediately after the suspension on the main game side corresponding to the first suspension display is terminated. The display mode may be the same as that of the pending digestion transfer image.

In addition, when it is configured to be able to display the pending digestion transfer image, the configuration may be as follows. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be employed, or a plurality of components may be combined. In addition, a configuration that employs only one of them or a configuration that combines a plurality of components, and one or more of the configurations of <<Example 1>>, <<Example 2>>, or <<Example 3>> in FIG. 88 described above can be combined with
(1) In the non-time-reduced game state, the pending digestion transfer image of the first main game side can be displayed, but the pending digestion transfer image of the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-reduced time gaming state, both the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side and the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(3) In the time shortening game state, the pending digestion transfer image of the second main game side can be displayed, but the pending digestion transfer image of the first main game side is not displayed.
(4) In the time reduction game state, both the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side and the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(5) The pending digestion transfer image can be displayed in the non-time-reduced game state, but the suspended digestion transfer image is not displayed in the time-reduced game state.
(6) The ratio of displaying the pending digestion transfer image in the time-reduced gaming state is higher than the ratio of displaying the pending digestion transfer image in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game side pending digestive transfer images are always displayed)
(7) The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state can be changed during symbol fluctuation.
(8) The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state does not change during symbol fluctuation (when configured so that the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(9) It is possible to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the time shortening game state during the pattern fluctuation. However, the rate at which the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state changes during pattern fluctuation is higher than the rate at which the hold digestion transfer image on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced game state changes during pattern fluctuation. less likely to do so.
(10) The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side in the time shortening game state does not change during symbol fluctuation (when configured so that the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(11) The pending digestive transfer image is a first pending digestive transfer image and a second pending digestive transfer image, unlike the above-described pending display having two pending displays such as a first pending display and a second pending display. We do not have two pending digestive transfer images such as images, we only have one pending digestive transfer image.
(12) During SP reach, etc., the first pending display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the pending digestive transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. Further, in the above, the configuration related to the display of the pending digestion transfer image in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state is described. ' may be replaced with 'non-probability varying gaming state and probability varying gaming state', or may be replaced with 'production mode A and production mode B'.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, as the display of the decorative patterns corresponding to one main game pattern, two displays of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG. , The configuration for simultaneously displaying two decorative patterns on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative patterns are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG, which is different from the configuration described above, is the fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. A difference from the second embodiment is that a distribution starter unit C50 having a first main game starter A10 and a second main game starter B10 is provided. Details of the distribution starter unit C50 will be described later, but as shown, the distribution starter unit C50 is provided with a first main game starter A10 and a second main game starter B10. , The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down near the second main game starter electric accessory B11hd attached to the distribution starter unit C50. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is ON, the second main game start electric accessory B11hd is configured to be easily opened, so the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag is On), by executing a right hit, the second main game starter electric accessory B11hd opens and the game ball enters the second main game starter B10 (second main game A game ball entered from the vicinity of the starter electric accessory B11hd is configured so that it is difficult to enter the first main game starter A10 and easy to enter the second main game starter B10. ing).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG has a second decorative design display area SG14 in which the second decorative design can be variably displayed, and a first decorative design variably displayed. A first decorative pattern display area SG15 which is an area to be obtained, a common hold display section SG16 which displays both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side, and the display related to the held hold that has been completed. and a pending passage route SG17 through which a certain pending digestion indication passes. In addition, on the upper part of the effect display device SG, there is a movable object for effect that is driven when an effect such as an SP ready-to-win effect is executed to prompt the player whether or not the player will win a big hit. YK is provided.

Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and operation diagram of the sorting start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start port unit C50 includes a common ball entrance C51 into which game balls flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game that is provided below the common ball entrance C51 and flows down from the common ball entrance C51. A starting point distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left and right direction around a support shaft) that distributes balls regularly in the left and right direction, and a starting point distribution member C50y provided below the starting point distribution member C50y. A first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y. The sorting starting port unit C50 configured in this way causes the game balls that have flowed into the common ball inlet C51 to tilt in the left-right direction of the starting port sorting member C50y, as indicated by the dotted line in the figure. , it is configured to guide to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. For example, the case where the starting point distributing member C50y is tilting leftward is defined as the "first position", and the case where the starting point distributing member C50y is tilting rightward is defined as the "second position". position", the game ball flowing into the common ball entrance C51 is guided toward the first main game start opening A10 under the condition that the start opening distribution member C50y is at the "second position", While the starting opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", the game ball flowing into the common ball entrance C51 under the condition that the starting opening distribution member C50y is at the "first position" Along with being guided to the game start opening B10 side, the start opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting motion of the starting port distribution member C50y in the left-right direction is performed by the weight of the game ball. , A game ball is alternately distributed to either one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball to either one, one game ball is distributed to the other) It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls. In the fifth embodiment, parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are configured to be variable at the same time. , the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side can be generated substantially evenly, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols can be frequently changed at the same time. It is

Next, FIG. 92 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the second main game side to start changing when the first main game side changes, and also when the second main game side changes, the first main game side changes. can start (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 93 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1407-1, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation) and the first main game symbols are not in fluctuation (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbols are not in fluctuation). ), and the main game symbols are held, and the small winning game is not in progress. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when executing the processing related to the first main game symbols, there is no problem even if the second main game symbols are fluctuating, but the first main game symbols are fluctuating. If there is, the fluctuation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, at step 1407-2, the game content determining means MN reads the main game side random number. Next, at step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds) the remaining hold information. Next, at step 1407-4, the game content determining means MN executes a main game symbol success/fail lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, at step 1407-5, the game content determining means MN determines stop symbols for the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the winning/losing lottery result, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, at step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN draws based on the main game symbol win/loss lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, at step 1407-7, the game content determining means MN issues a command (a command to the sub-control board S side, such as a symbol variation display start command, etc.) relating to the determined main game symbol information and game state information. to set. Next, at step 1407-8, the game content determination means MN sets the first main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 (second main game symbol variation management timer) for a predetermined time period related to the variation time of the main game symbols based on the variation mode. Set the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, at step 1407-9, the game content determination means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On part B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) is started. Next, at step 1407-10, the game content determining means MN turns on the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No at step 1407-1, at step 1407-11, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuating flag is turned on. If yes in step 1407-11, go to step 1407-12.

Next, at step 1407-12, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1407-12, at step 1407-13, the game content determining means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as fixed stop symbols, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. On the other hand, if No at step 1407-12, at step 1407-14, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1407-14, at step 1407-15, the game content determination means MN sends the first (second) forced stop execution command (a command to the sub side, and the first main game side has won a big hit). In this case, the second main game symbol will be lost and information will be sent to forcibly stop, and if the second main game side wins, the first main game symbol will be lost and information to be forcibly stopped is set). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, at step 1407-16, the game content determination means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbols on the part B21g) is stopped by changing the stop symbols to the losing symbols, the losing symbols are controlled to be displayed as fixed stop symbols, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbols stop at the big hit symbols, the second main game symbols that are fluctuating are forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbols hit the big hit. When the game is stopped at a symbol, the first main game symbol during fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to a loss. In addition, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, a command to the effect that the forcible stop is made to the sub-control board S side is set immediately before the forcible stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

Next, at step 1407-17, the game content determining means MN sends information (symbol determination display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1407-18, the game content determining means MN turns off the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, at step 1407-19, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1407-19, at step 1407-20, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device activation flag, and proceeds to step 1450. FIG. On the other hand, if step 1407-19 is No, the process proceeds to step 1450 without executing step 1407-20.

Next, at step 1450, the game content determining means MN executes the aforementioned specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Note that even if No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used to determine the variation mode of the main game table 3 and the second main game symbols used to determine the variation mode of the first main game symbols in the fifth embodiment. It is the main game table 3 that is played. Since the contents of the table are the same as those in the second embodiment, the description is omitted. It should be noted that the contents of the effect corresponding to the determined variation of the main game symbols will be described later.

Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side in the fifth embodiment. Differences from the second embodiment are step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth). When execution of (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the main control unit SM, is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes symbol standby display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100. Transition. In addition, after the sub-control board S executes the reservation information management process in step 2100, in step 2200 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a decorative design display content determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to step 2300. do. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, in step 2350 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the second decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Go to step 2400 . Also, after the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process at step 2400, at step 2500 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a background effect control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 3300 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a role product driving control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999 .

Next, FIG. 97 is a flow chart of symbol standby display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. flag) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines that both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are newly stopped (the first decorative design is stopped and displayed). In the situation, the second decorative pattern is newly stopped display, or in the situation where the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the first decorative pattern is newly stopped display). judge. In the case of Yes at step 2054, at step 2056, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and displays the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (which is an increment timer, and both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped). Start a timer for measuring the elapsed time since Next, at step 2058, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2060 also in the case of No in step 2052 .

Next, in step 2060, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and the timer value is the standby execution value (the decorative design stopped and displayed in the main area is set to the standby state). It is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached 20 seconds or more. In the case of Yes at step 2060, at step 2062, the decorative design display control means SM21 displays the decorative design stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. The standby state ends when either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative design display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, there are first decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols and second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols. and decorative patterns can be variably displayed at the same time, one of which is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub-area. It should be noted that the main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than the sub-area. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed with pictures and numbers, and the decorative patterns displayed in the sub-region are displayed only with numbers (numbers , the first decorative pattern is Arabic numerals and the second decorative pattern is Chinese numerals). In addition, as shown in the figure, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped and displayed under the condition that the first decorative design is displayed in the main area as a pattern and a number. After 20 seconds have elapsed, the display of the first decorative pattern in the main area is changed to the display of only the pattern. This display of only the pattern is called a standby state. The main area and the sub-areas may be provided within the same liquid crystal (for example, within the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), or may be provided in separate devices. As a specific example provided in separate devices, for example, a performance display device A and a performance display device B are provided as performance display devices, the performance display device A having a main area, and the performance display device B having a main area. A sub-area may be provided, and in the case of such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. good. Also, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative pattern display areas (main area, sub-area, etc.) may be three or more (providing first area, second area, third area, etc.).

Returning to the description of the flow chart, at step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, at step 2066, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). . Note that even if No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed with patterns and numbers, and the decorative patterns displayed in the sub-area are displayed only with numbers. The numerals in the pattern are displayed in Arabic numerals, and the numerals in the second decorative pattern are displayed in Chinese numerals. Also, the number of types of the first decorative design and the number of types of the second decorative design are four types each. In addition, although the details will be described later, the display mode of the decorative pattern when there is a trigger suspension that is a suspension related to whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed is the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table That is, the display mode of the first decorative design and the display mode of the second decorative design in the sub-region, and the display mode of the first decorative design when the trigger suspension exists And the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same.

Next, FIG. 99 shows the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. Differences from the second embodiment are steps 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing pending information display control means After SM22 deletes the pending information and shifts the remaining pending information, in step 2130 (fifth), the binding pending information display control means SM22 determines that the pending this time is the pending related to the first main game side. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines that the pending display variably displayed in the main area in the main route (holding passage route) passes. area, details of which will be described later) is set, and a command is set to execute a hold completion display (an effect that allows the player to recognize that the hold has been completed), and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the design reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the first decorative design and the second decorative design are in a standby state. do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 controls the sub-route (an area through which the pending display variably displayed in the sub-area in the pending passage route passes). , details of which will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). If No in step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, if the hold is completed on the first main game side, or if the hold is completed in the standby state, the hold is completed in the main route, and the standby display is executed. When the hold on the side of the second main game is terminated in a situation where no state exists, the display of the pending termination is executed in the sub-route.

Next, at step 2138 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. If Yes at step 2138 (fifth), at step 3050 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes pending change display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2116 . On the other hand, if No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of pending change display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the pending digestion is the pending digestion passing through the first main route after the occurrence of trigger suspension. In the case of Yes at step 3052, at step 3054, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger reservation is a reservation that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes at step 3054, at step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for jackpot time, and based on the number of holds at the time of trigger hold occurrence, hold change scenario (to trigger hold) A scenario for determining at what timing and how the pending display mode related to the trigger pending changes until the pattern variation is started is determined.

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big win and a table for a loss are shown as pending change scenario determination tables. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is the number of holds when the trigger hold occurs (the number of holds that will be digested before the trigger hold at the time when the trigger hold occurs), and the It will be determined by the result of the suitability of the symbol variation. In addition, the illustrated "before 1 change" is the pending display mode just before the trigger pending is digested, and the expectation of a big hit in the pending display mode of the "before 1 change" (when the trigger pending becomes a big hit The proportion of the total of the cases of winning and the cases of losing) is "rainbow → red → blue" from the highest. In addition, the pending display mode is configured to be changeable for each pattern variation, but as the trigger pending is completed, the pending display mode does not change, or changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a big win. It is structured as follows. That is, it is constructed so as not to change to a hold display mode with a low expectation of a big hit as the trigger hold is finished, so as not to impair the player's expectation of the trigger hold.

Returning to the explanation of the flow chart, at step 3058, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the pending passing route display color determination table for big hits, determines the display color of the pending passing route, and proceeds to the next process ( processing of step 2116). In the case of No at step 3054, at step 3060, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the table for determining the pending change scenario for the time of failure, and determines the pending change scenario based on the number of holds at the time of occurrence of the trigger hold. do. Next, at step 3062, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the pending passing route display color determination table for failure, determines the display color of the pending passing route, and proceeds to the next process (step 2116). ). Note that even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2116).

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a losing time are shown as reserved passage route display color determination tables. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passage route is determined by the result of the success or rejection of the pattern variation related to the trigger hold. The degree of expectation for the jackpot of the hold passage route display color (ratio of the hit to the sum of the hit and the loss of the trigger hold) is "Rainbow → Red → Blue → No change" from the highest. It has become. Although the pending passage route is configured to be determined only by the timing of the first pending release after the occurrence of the trigger pending, it is not limited to this, and is configured to be variable and changeable every time until the trigger pending is completed. may In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so as not to change to a display mode with a low expectation of a big hit as the execution of the trigger suspension approaches, similar to the change in the suspension display mode (holding change effect) described above. . Also, regarding the change in the display mode of the reserved display mode and the display color of the reserved passing route, although it is not specifically illustrated at what timing in the pattern variation, the notice effect at the start of the pattern variation and during the pattern variation It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed at various timings according to the effect to be executed, such as execution timing, when suspension occurs, and when suspension is completed. The change of the reserved display mode or the reserved passing route display color to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit gives a sense of expectation. In the fifth embodiment, the display color of the suspended passage route SG17, which is the display color of the suspended passage route, suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with the trigger pending (when the trigger pending becomes a big hit, the trigger pending is lost). The display color of the reserved passage route is more likely to change than in the case, or the display color of the reserved passage route is likely to be a display color with a high degree of expectation for a big hit), but it is not limited to this. It is displayed and has a display mode of the pending digestion transfer image, and when the display mode is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pattern variation related to the pending digestion transfer image, the pending passage route display color , the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image can be different, that is, it may be configured so that the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the pending digestion transfer image can be different, or the ease of changing the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image They may be configured differently. In addition, depending on the reserved passage route display color, the content of the pattern variation related to the digested reservation that passed through the reserved passage route SG17 can be different (the ratio of execution of the performance with high expectation of big hit can be different). You may

Next, FIG. 101 is an image diagram of pending occurrence display in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since parallel lottery can be executed, a situation in which the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side exist at the same time frequently occurs. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display portion SG16 common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, regardless of whether the hold that has occurred is the hold on the first main game side or the hold on the second main game side, (The most recent pending is displayed in the first area, and the pending display already displayed is "1 → 2 ” is shifted and displayed). It should be noted that the hold display mode is also the same for the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side. It is configured so that it cannot be determined whether it is a hold display on the side or a hold display on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 102 is a display image diagram of pending digestion in the fifth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the display in the common pending display section SG16 when the number of pending is four. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed. No. 2 displays "B1" which is the second main game side's hold, No. 3 displays "A2" which is the first main game side's hold, and No. 4 displays "B2" which is the second main game side's hold. It is Under such circumstances, the pending display when the pending is being consumed will be described in detail below.

The middle part of the figure shows an example of the order of the symbol variations related to the above-mentioned four holds, and the lower part of the figure shows an example of how the hold display is erased in the common hold display section SG16. With reference to these, a detailed description will be given of how the pattern variation is executed and the pending display is erased in the fifth embodiment. First, when the pattern variation related to A1, which is the hold on the first main game side, starts to be executed, the hold display in the first area, which is the hold display related to A1, is erased, and the remaining hold is shifted and displayed. be. The display in the common hold display section SG16 is "No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed at the symbol variation start timing related to A1. 10 seconds after that, execution of the pattern variation related to B1, which is pending on the second main game side, is started. The display in the common hold display section SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". Thereafter, after 20 seconds from the start of the symbol variation related to A1, the symbol variation related to B1 ends. In addition, the symbol variation related to A1 is in the process of variation. When the symbol variation related to B1 is completed, the suspension related to B2 is terminated and the symbol variation is started. It is configured such that the pending indication of the first area that was being displayed is erased. That is, visually, from the state where the first and second areas in the common reservation display section SG16 are lit, the display in the first area is extinguished, and then the display in the second area is the first area. will be shifted to . On the other hand, since the hold actually completed is the hold related to "B2", the display in the first area is the hold display related to "A2". Thus, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the hold that is actually consumed is the first main game side or the second main game side, the hold display displayed in the first area is It will be erased (turned off).

Next, FIG. 103 is a holding passage route image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the pending passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area SG10. The holding passage route has a main route through which the holding display variably displayed in the main region passes, and a sub-route through which the holding display variably displayed in the sub region passes. First, the left part of the same figure is an example of a case where the pending digestion display when the pending is digested passes through the main route. In the situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). A case will be described where "A1", which is reserved on the first main game side, is completed first. First, by digesting "A1", the pending display in the first area is erased, and the pending digested display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the pattern variation on the first main game side related to the suspension of "A1" is executed in the main area, the suspension completion display related to "A1" passes through the main route and goes to the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the same figure is an example of the case where the pending digestion display when the pending is digested passes through the sub-route. In the situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). A case will be described where "B1", which is pending on the second main game side, is completed first. First, by digesting "B1", the pending display in the first area is erased, and the pending digested display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the pattern variation on the second main game side related to the suspension of "B1" is executed in the sub-region, the suspension completion display related to "B1" passes through the sub-route and goes to the sub-region. . Thus, in the fifth embodiment, depending on whether the symbol variation is performed in the main area or in the sub-area, the area through which the pending digestion display in the pending passage route SG17 passes is the main route. is configured to determine whether the

Next, FIG. 104 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 are deleted. It is configured to be able to execute the look-ahead effect related to the holding on the side. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-reduced game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured to allow In addition, although it is configured so that the prefetching lottery on the first main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of pending occurrence, it is not limited to this, and the main game pattern variation start timing and main game pattern variation. It may be configured so that the prefetching lottery can be executed even at a timing in the middle.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flow chart of second main game win time look-ahead determination processing related to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth). The SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game is currently in the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2604. If No in step 2602 (fifth), the next process (process of step 2118) is performed.

Further, when the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2608 that the new hold is a big hit hold, in step 2610 (fifth), the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines a predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/3) is executed pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . In addition, when the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines that the new hold is the hold of group C in step 2612, in step 2616 (fifth), the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines that a predetermined probability (In this example, 1/10). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, even when there is a hold on the first main game side, the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-reduced game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured to allow In addition, it is configured so that the second main game side pre-reading lottery can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of pending occurrence, but it is not limited to this, and the main game pattern fluctuation start timing and main game pattern fluctuation It may be configured so that the prefetching lottery can be executed even at a timing in the middle. Also, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is the same as the prefetching lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2249-1, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2249-1, at step 2249-2, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes at step 2249-3, at step 2249-5, the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly executed hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 2249-5, at step 2249-6, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the main area. Next, at step 2249-7, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols, and 1 Determine the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design. Next, at step 2249-8, the design display content determination means SM21n selects the first design content determination flag (according to the design variation on the first main game side) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when such content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Further, in the case of No at step 2249-5, at step 2249-10, the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the pattern variation related to the newly digested pending pattern is a pattern variation from the standby state. judge. In the case of Yes at step 2249-10, at step 2249-11, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the main area. Next, at step 2249-12, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols, 2 Determine the stop pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern, and proceed to step 2249-15. In this way, when the decorative pattern newly starts to fluctuate from the standby state, it is variably displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative pattern is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. is configured as follows. In addition, when the decorative pattern which newly started to fluctuate from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, and when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate while the second decorative pattern is fluctuating, the first decorative pattern fluctuates. Until then, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, but when the first decorative design starts to variably display, the first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-area. or even if the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the second decorative pattern is continuously variably displayed in the main area and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area. It may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As described above, since the second decorative pattern is the second decorative pattern that has newly started to fluctuate from the standby state, when the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is displayed. , The display of the first decorative pattern and the pattern in the main area are the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative pattern is Arabic numerals, and the second decorative pattern is Chinese numerals).

If No at step 2249-10, at step 2249-13, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as a sub-area. Next, at step 2249-14, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols, 2 Determine the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design. Next, at step 3100 (fifth), the design display content determining means SM21n executes main area interrupt processing A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, at step 2249-15, the design display content determination means SM21n selects the second design content determination flag (which corresponds to the design variation on the second main game side) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when such content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Next, at step 3350 (fifth), the layout display content determination means SM21n executes a performance content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Further, if No in step 2249-3, in step 3150 (fifth), a prefetching display control process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Note that even if No in step 2249-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbols start to fluctuate in the standby state, the second decoration symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are displayed in the main area. However, it is not limited to this, and in situations other than when an interrupt effect is executed, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are always variably displayed in the main area (even in the standby state). Alternatively, the second decoration symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols may be variably displayed in the sub-region.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect display content determination processing related to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n reads out the result of the lottery for the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, at step 3354, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the winning/failure lottery result and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and determines the symbol variation. The content of the production concerned is determined. Next, in step 3358, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect contents related to the symbol variation, and performs the next process. (Processing of step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. Also, in the case of No at step 3354, in other words, if the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the second main game side, at step 3360, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n determines the result of the lottery and the second decoration symbol. Based on the variation mode, the second decorative symbol effect content determination table is referred to, and the effect content related to the symbol variation is determined. Next, in step 3362, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines the priority of the symbol change based on the determined effect contents related to the symbol change, temporarily stores the priority, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ). Note that priority will be described later.

Next, FIG. 108 is an example of a first decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the win/fail result of the first main game symbol and the variation time (fluctuation mode). The first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not to execute the effect, are configured to be determined. It should be noted that the degree of priority is relatively higher in the case of a hit or fail result than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the variable time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variable time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the pattern change, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of execution of the SP reach effect. Thus, the symbol variation (contents of effect) in which the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. It should be noted that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 109 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the second decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the win/fail result of the second main game symbol and the variation time (fluctuation mode), and the determined effect content causes an interruption. It is configured to determine the priority, which is an element for determining whether or not to execute the effect. In addition, unlike the first decorative design, the second decorative design does not have the two priorities of the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. It should be noted that the degree of priority is relatively higher when the result of winning is a big hit than when the result is a loss. In addition, when the variable time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variable time is short. It should be noted that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 110 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative design related to the design variation. Next, in step 3104, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes at step 3104, at step 3106, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n sets the interrupt enable flag (if the pattern variation of the determined second decorative pattern is A flag that is turned on when the variation is such that an interrupt effect can be executed is turned on. Next, at step 3108, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the character YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n sets the character object initialization flag (the character object YK to the initial position) in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. flag for activation) is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Incidentally, even if No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, after determining to variably display the second decorative design in the sub-region, the pattern variation of the second decorative design is interrupted (variably displayed in the sub-region It is configured to determine whether or not it is possible to execute the effect of exchanging the display areas of the decorative symbols and the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main area. Further, when it is determined that the second decorative pattern can be interrupted, the position of the accessory YK is confirmed, and when the accessory YK is in operation, the accessory YK is driven to the initial position. It is configured to control By configuring in this way, although the details will be described later, at the timing of executing the interrupt effect (the first timing among a plurality of timings), the proportion of the character YK stopping at the initial position is increased. be able to.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flow chart of the display control processing during prefetching according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3152, the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly completed hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 3152, at step 3154, the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly executed hold is not the trigger hold. In the case of Yes at step 3154, at step 3156, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the look-ahead first area, and proceeds to step 3158. FIG. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during execution of the look-ahead effect (from the start of execution of the first symbol variation after the presence of the trigger suspension to the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension), the first decoration The display area of the pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to change, and like the image of the effect display device during prefetching in the lower part of the figure, the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the lower left part of the display area SG10. 1 area is provided, and a look-ahead second area in which the second decorative pattern is variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are configured to have approximately the same display area. It is Also, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to display only numbers, as in the case of displaying in the sub-regions. As described above, in the case where two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device with the larger display area) displays two decorative patterns (the first The decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) may be configured to be variably displayed (or stopped).

Returning to the explanation of the flow chart, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3158, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design to be "look-ahead first area→enlargement at SP reach", and step 3158 transition to Thus, in the fifth embodiment, during execution of the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension during execution of the look-ahead effect, the variation of the decorative pattern related to the trigger suspension is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display area SG10 to SP reach. It is configured so that a production is executed. The decorative pattern that is not enlarged (for example, the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed) is variably displayed at a position that does not overlap the display area of the enlarged decorative pattern. All you have to do is Next, at step 3158, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the first sub-region symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols, and determines the stop symbols and the first decorative symbols. Determine the variation mode. As described above, since the variation mode of the decorative design during execution of the look-ahead effect is determined by referring to the first sub-region design table or the second sub-region design table, the display mode of the decorative design is displayed in the sub-region. It is a display of only numbers similar to . Next, at step 3160, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the first design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next processing (step 2300 processing). ).

If No at step 3152, at step 3162, the layout display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly executed hold is not the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3162, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the look-ahead second area, and proceeds to step 3168. In the case of No at step 3162, at step 3166, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design to be "look-ahead second area->enlarge during SP reach", and proceeds to step 3168. FIG. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger suspension is the suspension relating to the first decorative design or the suspension relating to the second decorative design, it is enlarged and displayed at the time of execution of the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension. is configured as follows. Next, at step 3168, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table based on the information about the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols, and determines the stop symbols and the second decorative symbols. Determine the variation mode. Next, at step 3170, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the second design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2300) is performed. ).

Next, FIG. 112 is a flow chart of the first decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative design in step 2316. After the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative design in step 2324, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-win image, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 controls the main control board M It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the variable display area (if the look-ahead effect is not being executed, the main area or sub-area ) to set a stop display command (confirmed display) to stop the first decorative pattern with a forced losing pattern, and the process proceeds to step 2340 . It should be noted that the display mode of the forced losing design of the first decorative design or the second decorative design will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 113 is a flow chart of the second decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2366, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the second design content determination flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2366, at step 2368, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2370, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the second design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2372, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. It should be noted that even if No in step 2366 , the process proceeds to step 2374 .

Next, at step 2374, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second design fluctuating flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2374, at step 2376, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, at step 2378, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 performs the second decoration based on the second decoration variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the pattern variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2378, at step 2379, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the second decorative design (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 3200 (fifth).

On the other hand, if No at step 2378, at step 2380, the decorative design display control means SM21 changes the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2380, at step 2381, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit is sent to the SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2380, in step 2382, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets the first composition variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2382, at step 2383, the announcement effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the announcement image and the ready-to-win image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). Note that even if No in step 2382, the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

Next, at step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes a main area interrupt process B, which will be described later. Next, at step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes at step 2384, at step 2385, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is stop-displayed (for example, The main side information temporary storage means SM11b is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes at step 2385, at step 2386, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design stop display command (determined display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 3250 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes a main area interrupt process C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390. FIG.

Further, in the case of No at step 2384, at step 2388, the decorative design display control means SM21 displays the second decorative design in the area that is being variably displayed (main area or sub-area if the look-ahead effect is not being executed). A stop display command (determined display) for stopping at forced losing symbols is set, and the process proceeds to step 2390 . It should be noted that the display mode of the forced losing design of the first decorative design or the second decorative design will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Next, at step 2390, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, at step 2392, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). transition to Note that even if No in step 2374 or step 2385, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Next, FIG. 114 is an image diagram of a stop symbol display at the time of a big hit in the fifth embodiment. First, the case where the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. After that, since the first main game symbol has stopped at the big win symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed in the main area ("777" in the figure). In addition, when the first decorative symbol is stop-displayed as the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped-displayed as the forced losing symbol. It should be noted that the forced losing symbol of the second decorative symbol is "giraffe", which is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative pattern is stop-displayed as a forced losing pattern, the background effect in the sub-region becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced losing pattern is stopped-displayed).

Next, the case where the second decorative symbol displayed in the sub-area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area. After that, since the second main game symbol has stopped at the big win symbol, the second decoration symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed in the sub area ("777" in the figure). Further, when the second decorative symbol is stop-displayed as the big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol is stopped-displayed as the forced losing symbol. The forced losing symbol of the first decorative symbol is "zoo", which is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the first decorative pattern is stop-displayed as a forced losing pattern, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced losing pattern is stopped-displayed). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbols are forced to stop due to a loss due to the first main game symbols stopping at the jackpot symbols, the second decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. and a forced losing pattern of the first decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed when the first main game pattern is forcibly stopped due to the second main game pattern stopping at the jackpot pattern. are configured to have different display modes. Incidentally, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area are different. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue" and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area may be "red". In addition, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same as the display mode (only the color is the same, but the pattern is different, etc.).

Next, FIG. 115 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3202, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative design has arrived. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing five seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, and it is configured to determine whether or not the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. there is In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the interrupt enable flag (which is turned on when the variation of the second decorative design itself can be interrupted in the above-described main area interrupt process A). flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation state of the first decorative design during fluctuation is in the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative pattern, the part before the start of the SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of the SP reach is the second half, and the variation in which the SP reach is not executed has only the first half. I'm assuming not.

In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines the first half priority of the first decorative design that is fluctuating in the main area and the priority of the second decorative design that is fluctuating in the sub-area. are compared, and the process moves to step 3212 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative design display control means SM21 gives priority to the latter half priority of the first decorative design that is fluctuating in the main area and priority of the second decorative design that is fluctuating in the sub-area. degree, and move to step 3212 . Next, at step 3212, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative design is higher than the priority of the first decorative design. In addition, the priority of the first decorative pattern is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210 . In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the character YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (with the accessory YK stopped at the initial position, A mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started) is set, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is activated (the state in which the accessory YK is activated by other than the interrupt effect). , a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. In this way, when the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative pattern, the interrupt effect can be executed. It is configured such that the effect mode of the interrupt effect is different depending on whether or not the game is stopped. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the interrupt effect is executed when the degree of expectation for the big hit of the pattern change is high (the priority of the second decorative pattern is high), so it is conspicuous when the player sees it ( It is more suitable to execute in a flashy) production mode. Therefore, it is preferable to execute both the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the character rather than only the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interrupt effect while the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, when the main area interrupt processing A is executed and the character YK is operating, the character YK is configured to move to the initial position, so that the effect when the interrupt effect is executed As a mode, it is possible to configure so that the ratio of selection of the performance mode when the accessory is not activated is increased. Incidentally, the interrupt effect (interrupt effect executed at the first interrupt timing) in steps 3216 and 3218 may be referred to as a first interrupt effect.

Next, at step 3220, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to step 3222. It should be noted that even if No in step 3202 , step 3204 or step 3212 , the process proceeds to step 3222 . Here, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub-area, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is displayed. In the case of a big hit, if the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not changed, the second decorative pattern variably displayed in the sub-region smaller than the main region is the big hit pattern. , and the joy of the player's winning is reduced. Therefore, by executing an interrupt effect and using the variable display of the second decorative pattern to be the big win as the main region, the big win pattern can be stopped and displayed in the main region, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. .

Next, at step 3222, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative design has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern is the timing five seconds before the end of the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern. In the case of Yes at step 3224, at step 3226, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design being changed is a design change that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3226, in step 3228, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative design is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher. In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the character YK is in operation as the effect during variation of the first decorative symbol. In the case of Yes at step 3230, at step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, at step 3234, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). Note that even if No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228, or step 3230, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is not determined that the priority of the second decorative design is higher than the priority of the first decorative design at the first interrupt timing, at the second interrupt timing When the following conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed as the second interrupt effect.
(1) While the second decorative pattern is fluctuating in the sub-region,
(2) The variation of the second decorative pattern is a variation that becomes a big hit,
(3) the priority of the second decorative pattern being changed is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher;
(4) The character YK is not operating as an effect during the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern,
When the above conditions are satisfied, an interrupt effect is executed.

Although not shown, the second interrupt effect is configured to be executed when the accessory YK is not operating, so it is preferable to set the effect mode in which the accessory YK is activated. is. Also, the effect mode of the second interrupt effect may be a effect mode in which the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative symbol is a symbol variation that will result in a big win when the role YK is activated. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub-area, the interrupt effect is executed and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area, and the second decorative symbols are variably displayed in the main area. However, when the interrupt performance ends, that is, the symbols on the second main game side related to the interrupt performance. When the variation is a loss, the timing when the variation of the second decorative pattern related to the interrupt performance ends, and when the pattern variation on the second main game side related to the interrupt performance is a big win, the timing of the end of the big win. , the first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub-area. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 117, but the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 115 may be symbol variation end timing=symbol variation stop timing. It may be the timing just before the stop or the timing just before the fixed stop of the symbol variation. Furthermore, if it is the last timing of interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times during one symbol variation period, it may be determined that the symbol variation is in progress. In addition, when an interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are exchanged, for example, when the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is performed. When the first decorative design is displayed in the sub-region and the second decorative design is displayed in the main region, the variable display of the second decorative design displayed in the main region is performed. Until the end, the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured not to be exchanged (during the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern in which the interrupt effect is executed, the next fluctuation of the first decorative pattern starts It is preferable to keep the second decorative pattern variably displayed in the main area even when the second decorative pattern is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116 is an image diagram of executing an interrupt effect in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the effect mode when the accessory is activated is illustrated. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. After that, five seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the second decorative pattern, and when the first interrupt timing comes, the role YK is activated as an effect corresponding to the variation of the first decorative pattern. In this case, an interrupt effect is executed, but since the character YK cannot be activated as an interrupt effect, the effect mode is changed to "liquid crystal display only" (effect mode in which the character YK does not operate). Then, an interrupt effect will be executed. In the same figure, it is illustrated that the character YK that has been operating as the effect related to the first decorative pattern returns to the initial position.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, there is illustrated an effect mode when the accessory is not activated. First, under the condition that the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area, the second decorative symbols are displayed. Five seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and at the time of the first interrupt timing, the character YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to activate the character YK as an interrupt effect, the interrupt effect is executed in the effect mode of "liquid crystal display + character object operation" (the effect mode in which the character YK is activated). It will happen. In the same figure, it is illustrated that the character YK is operating at the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupt effect related to the second decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing C related to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design being changed is a design change that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative design is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes at step 3254, at step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing a third interrupt effect as an interrupt effect. Next, at step 3258, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2390). Note that even if No in step 3252 or step 3254, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2390). In this way, even if the interrupt effect (second interrupt effect) cannot be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the pattern variation of the executed second decorative pattern is a variation that becomes a big hit, and (2) execution. When both of the two conditions that the priority of the applied second decorative pattern is a predetermined value (3 in this example) or more are satisfied, a third interrupt effect is performed as an interrupt effect at the timing when the second decorative pattern is stopped. is configured to run In addition, the stop timing of the second decorative pattern is called the third interrupt timing. In addition, as the effect mode of the third interrupt effect, since the execution of the third interrupt effect = the start of the big win, the effect mode of congratulating the player as if the big win is confirmed, or the same effect as at the start of the big win. can be configured to run. Moreover, it is good also as the production|presentation mode which the character YK operates. In addition, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the third interrupt effect is different between when the character YK is operating and when it is not operating as the effect content related to the variation of the first decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flow chart of background effect control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines that the prefetching flag (flag that turns on when the prefetch effect is being executed) is off. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 2522, at step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes at step 2524, at step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the timing for starting the variation of the decorative symbols in the first main area after the occurrence of the trigger suspension has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension, and based on the result of the trigger suspension, until the calculated time elapses. Determines the preview effect scenario during the look-ahead. Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram of execution of the forewarning effect during look-ahead. In the same figure, the preview effect scenario during prefetching is determined, and the state in which the prefetch effect is executed is illustrated. First, at the start timing of variation of the first decorative pattern after the occurrence of the trigger suspension (timing of start of variation of the decorative symbol whichever of the first and second decorative symbols starts to fluctuate earlier), the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension ends. Then, the time until is calculated, and the pre-reading announcement effect scenario during the period is determined. After that, when 20 seconds have passed since the timing of starting the first pattern variation, the display of "Atsui" is executed as a warning of the dialogue. After that, when 40 seconds have passed since the timing of starting the first pattern variation, a cut-in effect is executed. After that, when 60 seconds have passed since the first symbol variation start timing, an effect is executed in which the character YK is activated. After that, when 70 seconds have passed since the initial symbol variation start timing, the symbol variation relating to the trigger suspension is terminated. In the fifth embodiment, since the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are variably displayed at the same time, if the notice effect is executed based on the fluctuation time of one pattern change, the notice effect relating to any of the symbol changes is being executed, that is, it may be recognized which symbol variation is the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension, and the interestingness of the symbol variation related to the suspension other than the trigger suspension becomes low. put away. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the notice effect according to the elapsed time from the start of the first variation of the decoration pattern after the occurrence of the trigger suspension, the interest of the whole look-ahead effect is enhanced.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, at step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the prefetching flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, at step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "prefetching background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. In this way, the "prefetching background" is configured to be initially set when Yes in step 2526, that is, at the first variation start timing of the decorative pattern in the main area after the occurrence of the trigger hold. In other words, the timing of switching from the "normal background" to the "prefetching background" is the start timing of the symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is "background during prefetching", as described above with reference to FIG. A look-ahead second area in which the second decoration pattern is variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are arranged side by side and variably displayed in the same display area. It will happen. In the case of No at step 2522, at step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension has ended. If Yes at step 2534, at step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the look-ahead flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. It should be noted that even if No in step 2524 or step 2526 , the process proceeds to step 2538 . Next, at step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. If No at step 2534, at step 2540, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "prefetching background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. It should be noted that there is no problem with any display modes as long as the player can visually distinguish between the "prefetching background" and the "normal background".

Next, FIG. 119 is a flow chart of the character object driving control process related to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect contents related to the symbol variation have been newly determined. In addition, in step 3302, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect other than the execution of the look-ahead effect has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule for the character YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 activates the character YK based on the variation mode and effect content of the decorative symbols related to the symbol variation, and proceeds to step 3314. If No at step 3302, at step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a new preview effect scenario has been determined. It should be noted that in step 3308, it is determined whether or not the content of the presentation during execution of the prefetch presentation has been determined. In the case of Yes at step 3308, at step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule for the character YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes at step 3310, at step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 activates the character YK based on the preview effect scenario during pre-reading, and proceeds to step 3314. It should be noted that even if No in step 3304 , step 3308 or step 3310 , the process proceeds to step 3314 .

Next, at step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the character initialization flag (the change in the second decorative pattern is an interruptible change). It is determined whether or not the flag for moving the role product YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the role product YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. In the case of Yes at step 3314, at step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 moves the character TK toward the initial position. Next, at step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the character initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 3320 also in the case of No in step 3314 . Thus, in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is a variation that can be interrupted, if the character YK is operating from the initial position, it will not operate. It is configured to execute control to return the character YK that is in the initial position to the initial position. Next, at step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is now time to execute an interrupt effect. In the case of Yes at step 3320, at step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is the interrupt effect of the effect mode in which the character YK operates. Incidentally, as an interrupt effect in which the accessory YK is activated, for example, a second interrupt effect is executed in which an interrupt effect (first interrupt effect), which is the effect mode when the accessory is not activated, is executed at the first interrupt timing. , the third interrupt effect is executed, and so on. If Yes at step 3322, at step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 activates the character YK based on the effect mode of the interrupt effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Note that even if No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device in parallel. A lottery can be executed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side is set as the first decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side is set as the second decorative pattern, whereby the first main game side symbol variation and symbol variation of the second main game side can be displayed at the same time. Further, the first decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the sub-area having a smaller display area than the main area, and the second decorative pattern displayed in the sub-area. When the degree of expectation for the big hit of the pattern variation related to the above is high, the variable display of the decorative pattern desired to be shown to the player is displayed by executing an interrupt effect and displaying the second decorative pattern in the main area. The main area can be made to look larger, and the game becomes more interesting.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are displayed in the sub area. When the priority of the decorative pattern is high (for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high), an interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area, but the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is defined as Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment, and only the modifications from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 120 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are Steps 2249-16 (Fifth Modification 1) to Step 2249-26 (Fifth Modification 1). If it is determined that there is no trigger pending within the . In the case of Yes at step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), at step 2249-17 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the decorative design display area as the main area. Next, at step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly completed hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols. Based on this, the first main area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8. On the other hand, if No at step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), at step 2249-20 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbols and variation mode of the second main game symbols. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the second decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8.

Also, in the case of No at step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), at step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines that the newly digested hold is the first main game side It is determined whether or not it is a hold related to In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display area of the decorative design to the design of the previous first decorative design. Determine the same display area as the variation. Next, at step 2249-23 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the first main area symbol table or the first sub symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols. The area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Further, if No in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the decorative design display area to the previous second decorative design. It is determined to be the same display area as the pattern variation of. Next, at step 2249-25 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the second main area symbol table or the second sub symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols. The area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the second decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variant 1). Next, at step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the decorative design display area related to the design variation is a sub-area. If Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), go to step 3100 (fifth); if No, go to step 2249-15. Thus, in the modification 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate when not in the standby state, the previous pattern in both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern It is configured to be changed in the area (either the main area or the sub-area) that has been variably displayed by the change. Further, in the case of the standby state, if the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, regardless of whether the decorative pattern to newly start fluctuating is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, the new pattern from the standby state The decorative pattern that starts to change afterward is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern that starts to change later is variably displayed in the sub-area.

Next, FIG. 121 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. In the modification 1 from the fifth embodiment, it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area. Similar to the decorative pattern, the determined effect content determines the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not the interrupt effect is executed. It should be noted that the degree of priority is relatively higher when the result of winning is a big hit than when the result is a loss. In addition, when the variable time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variable time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the pattern change, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of execution of the SP reach effect. Thus, the pattern variation (contents of effect) in which the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. It should be noted that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 122 is a flow chart of the main area interrupt process A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 120 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth variant 1), step 3102 (fifth variant 1), step 3104 (fifth variant 1), step 3114 (fifth variant 1) and step 3116 (fifth variant 1). 5 Variant 1), that is, in step 3112 (Fifth Variant 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub-region is the second decorative symbol. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3102 (fifth variation 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the first half of the second decorative symbols related to the symbol variation. Next, in Step 3104 (Fifth Variation 1), the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Further, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the first half of the first decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. . In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n sets the first half priority of the confirmed first decorative symbol to a predetermined value (in this example, , and 2) to determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and if No, the next process (step 2249-15 process) is performed. Thus, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub-region and the case where the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub-region are both Since it is configured so that the interrupt effect can be executed even in the case, it is determined whether the variation of the decorative pattern currently displayed in the sub-region is a change that can execute the interrupt effect. Further, since the timing of executing the process is the timing before the start of the SP reach (timing before the start of symbol variation), the first half priority is confirmed as the priority.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flow chart of the first decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative design in step 2316, decoration is performed in step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or in step 2326 When the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines that the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-win image has not been reached, in step 3200 (Fifth Variation 1), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 performs main area interrupt processing, which will be described later. Execute B and move to step 2344 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth modification 1) of FIG. 123 in modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3236, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative design is being changed in the sub-region. In addition, in the modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interruption process B in FIG. When it is executed in the decorative design display control process, it is determined with respect to the second decorative design. In the case of Yes at step 3236, at step 3237, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative design displayed in the sub-region has arrived. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing after 5 seconds from the start of variation of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the sub-area at the first interrupt timing can execute an interrupt effect. It is configured to determine whether In the case of Yes at step 3237, at step 3238, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interruptible flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 3238, at step 3239, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing state of the decorative design being changed in the main area is in the first half. In this example, in the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the part before the start of the SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of the SP reach is the second half, and the fluctuation in which the SP reach is not executed has only the first half. and

In the case of Yes at step 3239, at step 3240, the decorative design display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the sub area. , go to step 3242-1. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3239, at step 3241, the decorative design display control means SM21 divides the second half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the sub area. Compare and move to step 3242-1. Next, at step 3242-1, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the decorative design displayed in the sub-region is higher than the priority of the decorative design changed in the main region. determine whether It should be noted that the priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241 . In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the character YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the character object is not activated (the character object YK is stopped at the initial position state), set a command to execute the determined interrupt effect, and proceed to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode at the time when the character product is activated (when the character product YK is activated other than the interrupt effect 3242-5, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the sub-region is higher than the first half priority or the latter half priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main region, an interrupt effect is executed. However, the effect mode of the interrupt effect is different depending on whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

Next, at step 3242-5, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to step 3242-6. Incidentally, even if No in step 3237, step 3238 or step 3242-1, the process proceeds to step 3242-6.

Next, at step 3242-6, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative design is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design interrupt timing has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3242-7, at step 3242-8, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative design being changed in the sub-region is a design change that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether the second half priority of the decorative design currently fluctuating in the sub-region is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. Determine whether or not (the second interrupt timing is a timing after the SP reach start timing, so the second half priority is determined). In the case of Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the character YK is in operation as an effect during fluctuation of the decorative design being fluctuated in the main area. do. In the case of Yes at step 3243-1, at step 3243-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interrupt effect. Next, at step 3243-3, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of the decorative design between the main area and the sub-area, and performs the next processing {step 2344 (fifth) processing. }. Note that even if No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9, or step 3243-1, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2344 (fifth) process}. In addition, in the modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the interruption effect is executed and the display of the decorative symbols in the main area and the sub-area is switched, the decorative symbols are newly displayed in the main area. Whether or not the symbol variation associated with 2 results in a big hit, the display area of the decorative symbol after that is configured to be the display area after execution of the interrupt effect. Specifically, when the first decorative design is displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-area, an interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative design is displayed in the main area. , the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-region, and even if the result of the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is a loss as a result of the execution of the interrupt effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main region in the next pattern variation. The pattern is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-region. The third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 124 may be the symbol variation end timing=symbol variation stop timing, the timing just before the temporary stop of the symbol variation, or the timing just before the fixed stop of the pattern variation. may be Furthermore, if it is the last timing of interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times during one symbol variation period, it may be determined that the symbol variation is in progress.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flow chart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 123 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are Step 3260 (Fifth Modification 1) and Step 3262 (Fifth Modification 1). It is determined whether or not the pattern variation of the decorative pattern that is fluctuating in the sub-region is the pattern variation that will result in a big win. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets the second half priority of the symbol variation of the decorative symbol being varied in the sub-region to a predetermined value. (In this example, 3) is determined (since the third interrupt timing is after the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3256. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2340).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device. As a configuration, parallel lottery can be executed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side is set as the first decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side is set as the second decorative pattern, It can be constructed such that the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side are displayed at the same time. Further, among the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the decorative pattern whose variable display is started first in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern whose variable display is started after that is displayed in the sub-area. Thus, the value of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be made equal, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. By frequently changing the display case, the player can be made to pay attention to both the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and not only can these listed concepts be combined or separated (generalized concepts), but also concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. may

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporarily stopped display is possible. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when temporarily stopped is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the second effect symbols variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1-2) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
A game information transmission means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-game part side when the performance display is executed on the sub-game part side, and the second identification information is variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed. and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling the first performance symbols to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the second performance symbols in the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display unit;
Both the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed within the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. and is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
When the second identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
The first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain effect period, and the temporary When the symbol for the first effect is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the symbol for the first effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern for the first effect A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitely stop-displayed is configured to be temporarily stop-displayed,
A pachinko game characterized in that the second performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one performance period. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying a plurality of types of first effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one type or a combination of multiple types of first effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to stop display on the performance display device SG);
After variably displaying a plurality of types of second effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one type or a combination of a plurality of types of second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, Second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to stop display on the performance display device SG),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed within a certain one performance period, they are definitely stopped and displayed, and within the one certain performance period. is configured to deterministically stop display after the second production pattern is variably displayed,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporarily stopped display is possible. When it is displayed, it is configured to be variably displayed again within the one effect period, and when the first effect pattern is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display A special stop display mode indicating that the special game will not be executed while indicating that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed after that can be stop-displayed as the first effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. is composed of
The pattern for the second effect, which is variably displayed within a certain effect period, cannot be temporarily stop-displayed before it is definitely stop-displayed within the certain effect period, or Even if the temporary stop display is performed before the definitive stop display within the period, the special stop display mode is used as the second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types. Even when the second performance symbols are definitely stop-displayed and cannot be stopped-displayed, the special stop display mode is configured not to be stop-displayed as the second performance symbols that are a combination of one type or a plurality of types. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporarily stopped display is possible. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when temporarily stopped is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
The second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period,
As the display state of the first effect symbols within a given effect period, there are a first display state in which the variably displayed first effect symbols are visible to the player, and a variably displayed first effect symbol. is hidden, or a second display state in which the symbols for the first effect are more difficult to see for the player than the first display state, and the second effect within a certain effect period The pattern for use is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed as the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, a specification that cannot be included when the first effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes the first effect symbol of the type or a second special stop display mode that does not include the first effect symbol of the specific type,
When the first effect symbol is temporarily stop-displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is temporarily stopped rather than the first special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution expectation of the special game after the end of the one performance period is higher when the pachinko game machine is statically displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, symbol reservation means MJ32) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that the reservation occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are made based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period,
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to the certain hold are satisfied, if the predetermined conditions are met, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and at the time when the certain specific hold occurs , if there is one or more holds that satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information prior to the specific hold, the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to the pending hold for earlier consumption exist. Within one effect period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stop-displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed, while the identification related to the specific hold is Within one effect period corresponding to the condition for starting the variable display of information being satisfied, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect pattern only when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that suspension occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are made based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period,
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
If the special stop display mode is stop-displayed as the performance symbol when the performance symbols are definitely or provisionally stop-displayed within a certain performance period, at least one special performance symbol and the special It is configured to be combined with a plurality of normal production patterns that are different types from the production patterns,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to the certain hold are satisfied, if the predetermined conditions are met, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and at the time when the certain specific hold occurs , if there is one or more holds that satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information prior to the specific hold, the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to the pending hold for earlier consumption exist. When the special stop display mode is definitively or temporarily stop-displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the plurality of normal performance symbols cannot be of the same type, while the identification related to the specific suspension When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stop-displayed within one performance period corresponding to the satisfaction of the information variable display start condition, the plurality of normal performance symbols can be of the same type. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and when displaced to the open state, the second start port (for example, the second A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult to enter the ball compared to the state where it is impossible to enter or in the open state;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determining means (e.g., game content a decision means MN);
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is variably displayed and then the first identification information is displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determining means (e.g., game content a decision means MN);
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the second identification information;
After the winning judgment result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period. has been
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
Within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display, and within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the special stop The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured so that the ratio of the fixed display or the provisional stop display is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that suspension occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are made based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
If there is a predetermined number of reservations at any timing within a certain production period, the first production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period are displayed within the certain production period. It is performed when the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to any of the predetermined number of reservations are satisfied after the variable display is continued even after the end of the one performance period without being definitely stopped and displayed. Within one performance period, while the first performance symbol that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is definitely stopped and displayed,
Even if there is a predetermined number of reservations at any timing within a certain production period, the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period are displayed within the certain production period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be definitely stopped and displayed at.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
There are a plurality of types of first performance symbols, and when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail judgment is winning, the combination of the first performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination is non-winning, the combination of the first performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
There are a plurality of types of second performance symbols, and when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the winning judgment is winning, the combination of the second performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination is non-winning, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the second performance symbols that are not of the same type is configured to be stopped and displayed,
The combination of the second performance symbols that can be stop-displayed when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is non-winner is larger than the total number of combinations of the first performance symbols that can be stop-displayed when the result of the win-fail judgment is non-won. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
The effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) has a plurality of types of effect display modes as effect display modes that are dependent when controlling the effect display contents displayed,
When displaying a certain first effect symbol among the plurality of types of first effect symbols, a display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in a certain type of effect display mode, and a certain type Different from the display attribute related to the certain first effect pattern in a different type of effect display mode from the effect display mode,
When displaying a certain second effect symbol among the plurality of types of second effect symbols, a display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in a certain type of effect display mode, and the certain type The display attribute of the certain second effect pattern in a different type of effect display mode is configured to be different from the effect display mode,
The result of the success/failure determination is non-won than the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in the combination of the first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination is non-win. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the combination of the second performance symbols that can be stop-displayed in any case has a higher probability that the certain second performance symbols are included.

(Sixth embodiment)
Here, although some of them have been described in the above-described embodiments, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-described embodiments is referred to as a sixth embodiment, which will be described in detail below. For example, in addition to the configuration including the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern described in the first embodiment, the configuration of the image display overlapping the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern of the fourth embodiment, It is possible to appropriately include one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment. Also, the configuration of the image display that overlaps with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate. Supplementally, it is not limited to the above-exemplified combinations, and as long as the configurations described in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment can be used as appropriate. It may be changed, or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate, including combination with an image display configuration that overlaps with the advance notice effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG.

<<Significance of terms>>
The significance of each term in the sixth embodiment will be explained in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations and effects related to the following terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Decorative pattern>
The decoration pattern is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and suggests or notifies the result of the winning lottery on the main game side. After starting the variation of the decorative pattern, it is temporarily stopped, and then fixedly stopped. In addition, it is configured to be able to suggest or notify the result of the winning lottery on the main game side by the stop display mode (stop symbol) at the time of fixed stop.
<Effect of decorative pattern>
(1) The decoration pattern makes it easy for the player to recognize that the game is changing, that it is waiting for a change, the result of the winning lottery, and the like.

<First decorative pattern>
The first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed so that the player can easily visually recognize it.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the production during fluctuation.
(2) The first decorative symbol can notify the result of the game by displaying the fixed stop.

<Second decorative pattern>
The second decorative design is a decorative design that indicates that the game is changing at all times or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative design or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative design.
<Effect of the second decorative pattern>
(1) Always displayed: The second decorative symbol can notify the result of the game by being fixed and stopped.
(2) When the first decorative design is difficult or invisible 1: When the first decorative design is displayed as fixed stop, the second decorative design may also be displayed as fixed stop, but the second decorative design is displayed as fixed stop. It is preferable to display (temporary stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or when the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized, and in this case, the result of the game is notified by this temporary stop display. can be done. .
(3) When the first decorative design is difficult or invisible 2: When the second decorative design is only variable display without temporary stop display and fixed stop display, and the first decorative design is difficult or invisible. Even if it is, it is possible to clearly notify that it is changing.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area for displaying the first decorative pattern. The first decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed in the main area.
<Effect of main area>
(1) A first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to perform variable display rich in performance.

<Sub-area>
A sub-region is a display region for displaying the second decorative pattern. The second decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed within the sub-region.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) A second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for change>
The variable waiting state is a state in which the main game symbols and the decorative symbols are not changed. During the fluctuation stop, it may also be referred to as a fluctuation stop state.
<Effects during variable standby>
(1) During variable standby, it is possible to inform that the game is not in progress.

<Waiting movie>
The waiting movie is a display of a moving image showing the player that there is no change.
<Effect of waiting movie>
(1) By displaying a waiting movie, it is possible to suggest that the table is empty and that a game can be played.

<Hold display>
The pending display is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and shows the number of variations that have not been executed on the main game side.
<Effect of pending display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the unchanged number.

<First hold display>
The first pending display is a pending display that is displayed so as to be easily recognized by the player.
<Effect of the first hold display>
(1) Players can perceive unchanging numbers.
(2) The possibility of winning can be suggested by changing the display mode of the first pending display.

<Second hold display>
The second reserved display is a reserved display which is displayed so as to be visible to the player at all times or when the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the first reserved display or when the player cannot visually recognize the first reserved display.
<Effect of second hold display>
(1) Players can perceive unchanging numbers.

<First reserved display area>
The first reserved display area is an area for displaying the first reserved display. A display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display may be performed.
<Effect of the first reserved display area>
(1) A first pending display can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to display the upper limit number of the first pending display.

<Second reserved display area>
The second reserved display area is an area for displaying the second reserved display.
<Effect of second reserved display area>
(1) A second pending display can be displayed.

<Shift Display (Shift Animation)>
A shift display (shift animation) is a display of a moving image when moving the first pending display displayed when the number of pending is reduced.
<Effect of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Pending Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
A pending occurrence display (a pending occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when a new first pending display is displayed when the pending number increases.
<Effect of Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Reservation display for production of the relevant fluctuation (holding digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting the variation is also referred to as a suspension digestion transmission image or a variation corresponding image, and is an image displayed when a certain suspension is digested.
<Effect of pending display for production of the change>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning with respect to fluctuations that are currently fluctuating.

<Reserved display area for effecting the change>
The suspension display area for effecting the change is an area for displaying an image to be displayed when a certain suspension is completed.
<Effect of the reserved display area for effecting the change>
(1) It is possible to display a pending display for effecting the change.
(2) It can be suggested that the pending display for effecting the change is displayed.

<Display Priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of the images and moving images displayed on the effect display device (the order in which they are displayed from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in an overlapping manner, it can be configured so that the player can easily see the images or moving images.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that the volume can be adjusted, and displays an image that indicates the currently set volume, the volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that volume adjustment is possible.
(2) A player can easily adjust the volume.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display indicates that the light amount can be adjusted, and displays an image showing the currently set light amount, the light amount adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the amount of light can be adjusted.
(2) A player can easily adjust the amount of light.

<Stage (production stage)>
A stage (production stage) is also called a mode (production mode), and is a production mode indicated by a background image.
<Effect of stage (production stage)>
(1) Display corresponding to the stage (first decoration pattern, advance notice, etc.) can be performed.

<Concealment Mode (Concealment Stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is a production stage (production mode) in which it is unclear whether the game state is a variable probability game state or a non-variable probability game state.
<Effect of latent mode>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state.

<Tempai>
Tenpai is also known as reach or reach state, and the symbol rows other than the symbol row that is scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end among multiple symbol rows are the same decorative symbols, and are scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end. It is a state in which the symbol row of is fluctuating.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) If the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol stopped in another symbol row is stopped in one more symbol row, it can be indicated that it is a win.

<Reach production>
The ready-to-win effect is a effect that indicates the expected degree of winning of the variation, and is a effect that occurs mainly after tenpai. The reach effects include normal reach (normal reach effect), super reach (super reach effect, SP reach effect, SP reach effect, first half of super reach, second half of super reach), and the like. Mainly, after reach is established before it develops into super reach (or, if it does not become super reach, all pattern rows are stopped (temporary stop) after reach is established) Normal reach is called normal reach, and it develops after reach is established. The production is called super reach (also called post-reach development production).
<Effect of reach performance>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of hit expectation of the variation.

<Notice (notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, effect) is mainly to suggest the degree of expectation of the change, but it can be used to suggest that there is a hit within the hold (e.g. pre-read notice, pre-read effect, etc.) There is also
<Effect of notice (notice display, effect)>
(1) It is possible to incite whether the variation is a hit or not.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) means that the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and it appears that the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but in fact, the decorative pattern is slightly moving (also called shaking fluctuation). is).
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if multiple variations are being performed.
(2) It is possible to influence whether or not to make a definite stop (in other words, whether to change again without making a definite stop, or whether to win without making a definite stop, etc.).

<Pseudo Ren>
Pseudo-run, which is also called re-fluctuation in a broad sense, is an effect that makes it appear that the decorative pattern is fluctuating multiple times in one fluctuation.
<Effect of pseudo-ream>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo ream suggestion pattern>
The pseudo-run suggestive symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when prompting whether or not a pseudo-run will occur.
<Effect of pseudo-representation pattern>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not a pseudo-run will occur.

<Pseudo consecutive (re-fluctuation) pattern>
A pseudo-run (re-fluctuation) symbol is one of special decoration symbols indicating that a pseudo-run (re-fluctuation) will occur.
<Effect of pseudo consecutive (re-fluctuation) pattern>
(1) It is possible to deterministically notify the occurrence of pseudo-running (re-fluctuation).

<Development pattern>
The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the ready-to-win effect will occur.
<Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the ready-to-win effect will occur.

<Look-ahead performance>
The look-ahead effect is a effect that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. On the condition that the trigger suspension has occurred (when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension that has occurred), the look-ahead effect is executed.
<Effect of look-ahead production>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Trigger pending>
Trigger suspension is a suspension that triggered execution of a look-ahead effect (determined to perform a look-ahead effect for the suspension that has occurred).
<Effect of holding trigger>
(1) It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning by the fluctuation of the trigger pending.

<Right shot instruction display>
The right-handed instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game start opening or the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the board surface, but is mainly displayed in the time-saving game state, indicating that the right-handed instruction should be executed. display.
<Effect of right-handed instruction display>
(1) In the time-saving gaming state, the player can be urged to hit to the right.

<Hitting method warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display)>
The hitting warning display is a display that indicates the recommended hitting when the hitting is different from the recommended hitting in the current game state.
(1) It is possible to urge the player to perform a beating method corresponding to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode determined in advance as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect displayed by the performance display device on the image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the character, and the like.
<Effect display effect>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the image itself, the motion of a character in a moving image, the motion of a character, etc., which are targets.

<Full rotation>
The full-rotation effect is a state in which the first decorative symbols or the second decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while the symbols are aligned.
<Effect of full-rotation production>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the variation will be a hit.

<Promotion performance>
The promotion production is a production that incites whether or not it is changed from a non-probability variation pattern to a probability variation pattern or whether it is changed from a low round per (for example, 4R per) to a high round per (for example, 16R per). It is a performance. A promotion performance can occur not only during variation but also during a big win. A promotion effect that incites whether or not to change from a non-probable pattern to a probable pattern is called a probable promotion effect, and a promotion effect that incites whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit is sometimes called a round promotion effect.
<Effect of promotion production>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not the non-probability variation pattern is changed to the probability variation pattern.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit.

<Reach Voice>
A reach voice is an announcement suggesting the degree of expectation of winning or the like by a sound generated when a reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has passed since the reach is established.
<Effect of Reach Voice>
(1) When it becomes a reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning in combination with the image display, the movement of the accessory, and the like.

FIG. 126 shows the display screen during variable standby displayed on the effect display device SG and the display priority. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-reduced time gaming state will be described. Currently, fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the waiting movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , The second decoration symbol is similarly displayed as "437" in a stopped state, the second suspended display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second suspended display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is displayed, and the pending display for the effect of the change (it is displayed when the first pending display is erased when the change starts, and is displayed until the end or partway through the change ( When the next variation is started even after the display ends, the suspension display for the effect of the variation corresponding to the next variation is displayed)), the first suspension display on the first main game side, the second main game side is not displayed. The display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side are different, and the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is The number indicating the number of reservations is hollowed out, and the number indicating the number of reservations is not hollowed out in the display mode of the second reservation display on the second main game side. The display priority is as follows: second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. In addition, the display priority may be the second reserved display > second decorative design > first decorative design, and since the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, the second decoration Design=second reserved display>first decorative design.

Next, the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-shortening game state will be described. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stop, and in a non-time-reduced game state The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side which were displayed in the variable waiting screen display 1 are not displayed. It should be noted that, similarly to the variation waiting screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced game state, the suspension display for the effect of the variation, the first suspension display on the first main game side, and the first suspension display on the second main game side are displayed. not Here, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stop, a waiting movie is displayed to indicate that the fluctuation is on standby (variation stop), and the waiting movie uses a part of the reach production. ing.

In addition, in the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the suspension display area for the variation (the place where the suspension for the variation is displayed) Although the configuration has been described in which the display for showing the status) and the first suspension display area on the first main game side (the display for indicating the location where the suspension is displayed) are not displayed, it may be configured to display them. For example, each display area may be partitioned as a reserved display area for effecting the change and a first reserved display area on the first main game side. As a result, even during the variable standby (variable stop), it is possible to suggest that the display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display or the pending display for effecting the variation is displayed. In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-reduced time gaming state, in the same way as (in the same position) as the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-reduced time gaming state, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display (first Main game side, second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the number that has not changed in the first pending display, but can recognize that the number is not changed in the first and second decorative symbols in addition to the waiting movie, and the second pending display. The display may be configured to allow the recognition of unchanged numbers.

Next, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortening game state will be described. Currently, there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the waiting movie) , the first decorative symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped at "437", the second decorative symbol is similarly displayed in a state of being stopped at "437", and the second pending display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second reserve display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", "→→ right hit →→" is displayed as the right hitting instruction display, and the suspension display for the effect of the change, the first main game The first pending display on the side and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. It should be noted that, similarly to the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side are different. , In the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side, the number indicating the pending number is hollowed out, and in the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side, the number indicating the pending number is Not hollowed out. The display priorities are as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. In addition, the display priority may be right-handed instruction display > second reserved display > second decorative design > first decorative design, and right-handed instruction display is the second decorative design and second reserved display. Since there is no superimposition, it may be right-handed instruction display>second decorative design=second reserved display>first decorative design.

Next, the variable waiting screen display 2 in the time shortening game state will be described. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation was stopped, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern displayed in the fluctuation waiting screen display 1 in the time shortening game state , the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. It should be noted that, similarly to the variation waiting screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced game state, the suspension display for the effect of the variation, the first suspension display on the first main game side, and the first suspension display on the second main game side are displayed. not In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-reduced time gaming state, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable stop, a standby movie indicating variable standby (variable stop) is displayed. The standby movie is the same as the standby movie displayed in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced game state.

In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time shortened gaming state or the variable waiting screen display 2 in the time shortened gaming state, the suspension display area for the effect of the change (to indicate the place where the suspension for the effect of the change is displayed) display) and the second main game side first suspension display area (display for showing the place where the suspension is displayed) are not displayed, but they may be displayed. For example, a display may be performed in which each display area is partitioned as a reserved display area for effecting the change and a first reserved display area on the second main game side. Thus, even during the time shortening game, it is possible to suggest displaying the pending display for effect of the change, and to make it easy to recognize the number of the first pending displays on the second main game side. In addition, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortened game state, in the same way as the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortened game state (in the same position), the second decorative pattern, the second pending display (first main game side, second main game side), may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the number that has not changed in the first reserved display, but can recognize that the number is not changed in the second decorative pattern in addition to the waiting movie, and the number that has not changed in the second reserved display. It can be configured to recognize numbers.

In addition to the screen display configuration described above, various screen display configurations are possible. 1, the second holding display on the first main game side and the second holding display on the second main game side are not displayed; If there is no hold on either side and a predetermined period has passed, the variable standby screen display 1 can be shifted to the variable standby screen display 2, but in the time shortening game state, the variable standby screen display 1 is displayed. , Even if there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side and a predetermined period of time has passed, the screen display 1 during variable standby does not shift to the screen display 2 during variable standby. good too.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display will be described with reference to FIG. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time-reduction game state will be described. In the non-time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop) or during the variable. Volume adjustment is performed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) When the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen ends. If it is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the non-reduced time gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the production holding for the change If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , for example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input indicating end of volume adjustment screen The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent may be reduced respectively), only the display indicating the volume may be displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. It is good also as only two combinations of. If only the display indicating the volume is used, or only the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is fluctuating but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is fluctuating. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is as follows: second decorative pattern>second reserved display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the change). In addition, the display priority is 2nd decorative pattern = 2nd reserved display, 2nd decorative pattern < 2nd reserved display, 1st decorative pattern < 1st reserved display (and reserved display for production of the change), even if good. If a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed during display of the standby movie, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) or during the fluctuation. In the time shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first main game side, the second reserve display on the second main game side, right hand An instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If there is a change in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display on the first main game side, the second reserved display on the second main game side, and the reserved display for effecting the change If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and although not shown, during fluctuation, the volume adjustment screen is displayed smaller than during fluctuation standby (variation stop). is preferable, and for example, it may be configured so that the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern do not overlap. For example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen SB display and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent) may be reduced, or only the display indicating the volume may be displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. If only the display indicating the volume is used, or only the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is fluctuating but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is fluctuating. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priorities are as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative pattern>second reserved display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second reserved display>second decorative design, second decorative design>second reserved display>right-handed instruction display, second reserved display>second decorative design>right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, second decorative design=second reserved display, first decorative design<first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-shortening game state will be described. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop). Light amount adjustment is performed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the light intensity adjustment screen (display indicating the light intensity, display of the cross button indicating the light intensity adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) When the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the light amount adjustment screen ends. If it is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the non-reduced time gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the production holding for the change If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during variable standby (variation stop) (display indicating light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 indicating light intensity adjustment method, sub-input indicating termination of light intensity adjustment screen The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent may be reduced respectively), or only the display indicating the amount of light may be displayed, or the display indicating the amount of light and the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light may be displayed. It is good also as only two combinations of. In the case of displaying only the amount of light, or combining only the display of the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display where the visibility is particularly desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the production holding for the change If there is display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light quantity adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: second decorative pattern>second reserved display>light amount adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the change). In addition, the display priority is 2nd decorative pattern = 2nd reserved display, 2nd decorative pattern < 2nd reserved display, 1st decorative pattern < 1st reserved display (and reserved display for production of the change), even if good. If a button operation related to light intensity adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed during display of the standby movie, display of the standby movie is ended and a light intensity adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, light amount adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop). In the time shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first main game side, the second reserve display on the second main game side, right hand An instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 showing light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button showing end of light intensity adjustment screen SB display and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent) may be reduced, or only the display indicating the light amount may be displayed, or the display indicating the light amount and the cross button SB-2 indicating the light amount adjustment method may be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. In the case of displaying only the amount of light, or combining only the display of the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display where the visibility is particularly desired. If there is a change in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display on the first main game side, the second reserved display on the second main game side, and the reserved display for effecting the change If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative pattern>second reserved display>light amount adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second reserved display>second decorative design, second decorative design>second reserved display>right-handed instruction display, second reserved display>second decorative design>right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, second decorative design=second reserved display, first decorative design<first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, screen display during normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second pending display "2" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Suspended display "0", Suspended display for the effect of the change, 1st suspended display on the first main game side (2 pieces) are displayed, and the 1st suspended display on the 2nd main game side is displayed. do not have. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time-reduced game state, when a ball is entered into the second main game start port B10, the first pending display of the second main game side is displayed, and the second main game side second The hold display is counted up (added), and when the variable ball related to the hold on the second main game side is started, the first hold display on the second main game side is decreased by one, and the second hold on the second main game side. The display is configured to count down (subtract). Specifically, currently, there are two holds on the first main game side, two first hold displays on the first main game side, "2" on the second hold display on the first main game side, The first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a ball is newly entered into the second main game start gate B10. When there is, one first pending display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second pending display on the second main game side is updated from "0" to "1". The display priority is as follows: sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) > second reserved display > main region (variable display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > reserved display for effecting the change > The first pending display on the first main game side > the first pending display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) < second reserved display, sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) = second reserved display, or the main region The display priority of (variation display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to be the lowest among these, and the first suspended display on the first main game side < the second main game 1st pending display on the side, 1st pending display on the 1st main game side = 1st pending display on the 2nd main game side.

Next, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is fluctuating, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second reserved display "0" on the first main game side, the second on the second main game side 2 Hold display "2", hold display for the effect of the change, first hold display (two pieces) on the second main game side, right-handed instruction display, and first hold on the first main game side display is not shown. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the time shortening game state, even if a ball is entered into the first main game start port A10, the first holding display on the first main game side is not displayed. The second pending indication is configured to count up. The display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display> sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) > second reserved display > main region (variation display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > the fluctuation Retained display for effect>First retained display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) < second reserved display, sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) = second reserved display, or the main region The display priority of (variation display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to be the lowest among these, and the first pending display on the first main game side may be displayed. , Suspended display for effect of the change > First suspended display on the first main game side > First suspended display on the second main game side, or Suspended display for effect on the second main game side > First suspension on the second main game side Display>The first pending display on the first main game side may be set.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 128 will be supplemented.

In the non-time-reduced game state (state without electric support state), the first main game side hold display is displayed in the display mode of "●" as the first hold display. On the other hand, in the time-reduced game state (state accompanied by an electrical support state), the second main game side pending display is displayed in the display mode of "heart (solid)" as the first pending display. Also, the second pending display is the same regardless of whether it is in the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state. This is the display mode, and the second pending display on the second main game side is in the display mode of "filled numbers". It should be noted that the difference between the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is indicated not only by hollowing out or filling in, but also by using different colors of numbers, etc. may be configured.

In addition, in the case of the configuration of the start opening (see the fifth embodiment) in which the ball is alternately entered into the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10, the first reservation on the first main game side The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first suspension display on the second main game side may be the same, and the first suspension and It may be configured to display the first pending display on the second main game side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 the ball has entered.

In the main area, the first decorative pattern is scrolled from top to bottom (specifically, 1→2→... While scrolling in the order of →7→8→...1→..., the first decorative symbols displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed, and temporary stop→fixed stop in the order of left and right. ) is performed, but in the sub-regions, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the left, middle, and right columns as if it were changing on the spot at the lower right of the effect display device SG (that is, the effect Fluctuation display that appears to move from top to bottom only in a part of the display area instead of moving from top to bottom using the entire display device SG).

Also, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time-reduced game state, the effect pending display of the change and the first main game-side first pending display are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time-reduced game state, At the lower left of the effect display device SG, the effect pending display of the change and the first pending display on the second main game side are displayed, and the player is currently playing mainly through which starting port. (The first main game start port A10 is the main in the non-time shortened game state, and the second main game start port B10 is the main in the time shortened game state). ” or “Heart (filled in)”), or the display position of the first pending display on the first main game side or the first pending display on the second main game side (in the non-time reduction game state, the first main game side 1 pending display is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time shortening game state, the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG). ing. The display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether it is in the non-reduced time game state or the reduced time game state. is.

Here, the first holding display on the first main game side, the first holding display on the second main game side, and the second holding display on the first main game side that can be displayed during fluctuations in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state The display patterns of the pending display and the second pending display on the second main game side, including modification examples, will be described in detail below.
(1) First pending display (1-1) In the non-time-reduced game state, only the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed) to shorten the time. In the gaming state, only the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the first main game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Only 1 pending display is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time-reduced game state, only the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed), and in the time-reduced game state, the first main game display is displayed. A first pending display on the game side and a first pending display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second pending display The second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed in both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state. .

The area in which the first pending display on the first main game side, the first pending display on the second main game side, and the pending display for effecting the change are displayed are collectively referred to as a first pending display area, and the first pending display on the first main game side is The area where the second pending display and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as the second pending display area. Supplementally, in the second reserved display area, unlike the first reserved display area, the display corresponding to the change display of the change, such as the hold display for effecting the change, is not performed. In other words, the second suspension display for indicating that the number is fluctuating is not additionally displayed, and only the number of suspensions (the number of non-fluctuations) is displayed.

The effect pending display of the variation is the same display mode regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced game state, the fluctuation on the first main game side and the fluctuation on the second main game side are larger than the first hold display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and if it is a time shortened game state, it is from the first hold display on the second main game side, regardless of whether it is a fluctuation on the first main game side or a fluctuation on the second main game side It is displayed as a large "heart (filled)". It should be noted that the suspension display for effect of the change can be displayed only in the case of the change on the first main game side (when the condition for starting the change on the first main game side is satisfied) in the non-time-reduced game state {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed in the fluctuation of the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game side is satisfied)}, and if it is in the time shortening game state, the fluctuation of the second main game side (the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the game side is satisfied) {that is, the fluctuation on the first main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied) is not displayed}. good too. In addition, as an effect according to the degree of expectation of the change, the display mode of the pending display for the effect of the change may be changed. etc.), or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game, "heart" for the second main game) → ☆, etc.), and the number of display patterns , in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of patterns in the variation of the first main game side (for example, the default color, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color patterns in total 6 colors. Hit expectation is The default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color.) is the number of patterns in the variation of the second main game side (for example, default color, red, rainbow color, total 3 color patterns. Win The degree of expectation is greater than the default color < red < rainbow color. Equipped with a total of 6 color patterns of green, red, and rainbow colors.The hit expectation is the default color<blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow color.) is the number of patterns ( For example, a default color, red, and rainbow colors are provided, and the expected win rate is higher than the default color<red<rainbow color.). Note that the same pattern number relationship may also be adopted for the undigested hold (first hold display).

The display priority of the first pending display and the second pending display is the second pending display>the first pending display, and when both pending displays are displayed even during normal fluctuation, The display priority of the second pending display is set higher than the display priority of the first pending display. For example, when a notice image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next notice), SP reach, the first decorative pattern, etc. are displayed, the second pending display> notice image (or SP reach, the first decorative pattern, etc.) > The first pending display is displayed.

Whether or not the overlap between the first decorative design and the second decorative design and whether or not the overlap between the first reserved display and the second reserved display is possible are as follows, including modified examples (if necessary, FIG. 126, FIG. 128, etc. ).
(1) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the second decorative design (1-1) During the fluctuation standby (variation stop), the first decorative design and the second decorative design overlap (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part is , the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design), the stop display positions of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are determined (not shown).
(1-2) During the fluctuation standby (change stop), the first decorative design and the second decorative design do not overlap, and during the fluctuation, the first decorative design and the second decorative design overlap (depending on the display priority, overlap In the part, the stop display positions of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are determined so that the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design.
For example, if it is a non-time-reduced game state, it may be configured as (1-1), if it is a time-reduced game state, it may be configured as (1-2), and if it is a non-time-reduced game state (1- The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may be used even in the time shortening game state.
(2) Possibility of overlap between the first pending display and the second pending display The first pending display on the main game side) and the second pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side) do not overlap, the first pending display and the second The display position of the pending display is determined. It should be noted that this is also applicable during the fixed stop.

Whether or not the first decorative design and the first reserved display overlap, Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap, Whether or not the first decorative design and the second reserved display overlap, Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display Whether duplication is possible or not is as follows.
(A) Non-time-reduced gaming state (1) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the first reserved display During both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation, the first decorative design and the first reserved display The display positions of the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined so as to overlap (the overlapping portion is displayed in front of the first reserved display in the first decorative design due to the display priority).
(1) 'Possibility of overlap between the first decorative pattern and the first reserved display The first decorative pattern and the first reserved display overlap during both the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation (depending on the display priority, The display positions of the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined so that the overlapping portion is displayed in front of the first decorative design.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the second reserved display A display position of the second pending display is determined.
(3) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the second reserved display The first decorative design and the second reserved display overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part , the display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display are determined so that the second reserved display is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display A display position of the first pending display is determined. In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined to overlap at least during fluctuation, and similarly in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative design and the second reserved display It is determined to overlap at least during variation, and may be determined to overlap or not to overlap during game standby.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Overlap possibility of the first decorative design and the first reserved display The first decorative design and the first reserved display overlap both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during fluctuation The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first reserved display are determined so as not to occur. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to overlap rarely (lower frequency than the non-time-reduced game state) during fluctuation.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, so that the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap A display position of the second pending display is determined.
(3) Overlapping of the first decorative design and the second reserved display Whether or not the first decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation, so that the first decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap A display position of the second pending display is determined. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to overlap rarely (lower frequency than the non-time-reduced game state) during fluctuation.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, so that the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap A display position of the first pending display is determined.

Next, screen display during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. First, the screen display 1 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is in the SP reach, the second decorative pattern variation display in the sub-region, the second reservation display "2" on the first main game side, the second reservation display "0" on the second main game side, the variation The pending display for effect is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4), and the second main game start port B10. When the game ball is entered in , the second reservation display on the second main game side is updated (however, up to reservation 4). In addition, the first pending display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (flat stage screen, etc.) which is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state after the end of the SP reach, but at this time SP The first pending display is displayed including the number of balls entered during reach. Specifically, if the number of holds increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first hold display will not be displayed during SP reach, but three first hold displays will be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen. of. The display priority is as follows: sub-area (variation display of the second decorative pattern)>second reserved display>reserved display for effect of the change>SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, the screen display 2 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, the SP reach is in progress, the character YK has moved to the front of the effect display device SG, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area, the second suspended display "2" on the first main game side, The second pending display "0" on the second main game side, the pending display for effecting the change is displayed, the variable display of the first decorative pattern in the main area, and the first pending display on the first main game side are displayed. It has not been. It should be noted that the suspension display for effecting the change may be configured not to be displayed.

In this way, under certain circumstances {during SP reach, during operation of the role product, promotion production (production to incite whether or not to be promoted from the even number pattern, which is a non-variable pattern, to the odd number pattern, which is a probability variation pattern), while displaying an error screen, etc. }, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the SP reach by not displaying the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side. It should be noted that even during the SP reach, the first decoration symbol may be displayed in the main area in a variable display or the first holding display on the first main game side may be displayed. In this case, the first decoration in the main area may be displayed. The variable display of the pattern is preferably displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the effect display device SG (almost the same size as the variable display of the second decorative pattern or slightly larger than the variable display of the first decorative pattern), and the main area. By displaying the variable display of the first decorative pattern in , it is possible to show the player the reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") or the reach pattern (for example, only one "4" is displayed). Become. The display priority is as follows: sub-area (variation display of the second decorative pattern)>second reserved display>reserved display for the effect of the change>liquid crystal effect {effect display (in FIG. 129, the star-shaped character YK has fallen Sometimes, it is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes it look like it is shining upward with the falling position as a reference)}.

Next, updating of the first pending display and the second pending display will be described with reference to FIG. 130 . First, the fluctuation is finished, and the fluctuation is stopped with two holdings on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, the first pending display on the first main game side begins to shift its display position (shift animation starts), and the second display on the first main game side begins to shift. The hold display is decremented from "2" to "1" immediately after the fluctuation starts. Next, before the shift of the first reservation display on the first main game side ends, a game ball is newly entered into the first main game start port A10, and the first A pending occurrence display (holding occurrence animation) is performed in which the first pending display on the main game side increases by one, and the second pending display on the first main game side immediately changes from "1" to " 2”.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 130 will be supplemented.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the starting hole), the execution time (for example, 1000 ms) of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display {from the lower part of the effect display device SG It is an effect that the hold gradually appears and is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display ( addition time and subtraction time, which are configured to be longer than, for example, 100 ms). Also, the execution time (for example, 1500 ms) of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display {The hold displayed in the place where the Nth hold is displayed moves, and the N-1th It moves to the place where the suspension is displayed, and then it is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the N-1th suspension is displayed). is configured to be longer than the update time of the second pending display. Furthermore, the update time of the second pending display is shorter than the variable fixed time (for example, the fixed variable time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms, and the fixed variable time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and the shortest variation. It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the first pending display can simultaneously (overlap) display the shift display (shift animation) and the pending occurring display (suspended occurring animation) {that is, the first pending display can display the pending When execution of a shift indication (shift animation) is started while an occurrence indication (pending occurrence animation) is being executed, the pending occurrence indication (pending occurrence animation) and the Shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time, and execution of pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is started during execution of shift display (shift animation), shift display (shift animation ) can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the shift display (shift animation) and pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation). }, but it is impossible to display subtraction and addition at the same time in the second pending display. It will happen. When the number of reservations increases immediately before the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation starts, the second reservation display performs the display of addition (due to the start of fluctuation) and then the display of subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation). It should be noted that both subtraction and addition require the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or from "1" to "2") (because the number display switches) required time) is 100 ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) blue hold change" will be described. First, it is in a fluctuation stop state in a state where there are four holds. Next, a change is started, and the number of holds becomes 4 due to the new ball entry, and further, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is blue hold. Next, the change just before the blue hold ends, and the change just before is a loss ("861"), and the change is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to Blue Suspension is started, and Blue Suspension is displayed as a production suspension display (blue) for the variation. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation is started with red reservation (in other words, a fluctuation time with a low expectation of winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, it is 7 reach, and 7 reach is higher than other reach (eg, 2 reach)). 2 decorative pattern does not become a specific reach mode, and continues to display fluctuation), but when the fluctuation starts with blue retention, a specific reach mode than when the fluctuation starts with red retention described later is less likely to occur. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) that is a win, but when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, it fluctuates with red reservation. It has a lower probability of being in a particular final appearance than it is in the beginning. Next, the case of "(2) red hold change" will be described. The basic flow is the same as "(1) blue pending change", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) is different. First, it is in a fluctuation stop state in a state where there are four holds. Next, a change is started, and the number of suspensions becomes 4 due to the new entry, and further, the display mode of the first suspension display corresponding to the new entry is red suspension. Next, the change immediately before the red hold ends, and the change immediately before is a loss ("861"), and the change is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to Red Suspension is started, and Red Suspension is displayed as a production suspension display (red) for the variation. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with red holding, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with blue holding (in other words, a fluctuation time with a high degree of expectation for winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues to display variable), but is red reserved. When the change starts, the probability of a specific reach state is higher than when the change starts with blue pending. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but when the fluctuation starts with red reservation, it changes with blue reservation The probability of being in a particular final display mode is higher than in the case of starting. As an example, the probability of reaching reach with blue reservation is 90% of the variation related to blue reservation, the probability of reaching reach with red reservation is 99% of the variation related to red reservation, and the difference is 9% is. In addition, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode (eg, 7 reach) in blue retention is 5% in the case of reach due to fluctuations related to blue retention, and a specific reach mode in red retention (eg, 7 reach) The probability of becoming a reach is 30% when it becomes a reach due to a change related to red holding. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of reaching a reach in both blue hold and red hold is set high and the difference between them is set not to be large, and the probability of a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set not to be so high. In addition, it is desirable that the difference between them should be relatively large. As a result, while the expectation that the reach will be achieved by changing the hold is secured to some extent, by setting a difference in the degree of expectation for the subsequent development (what number will reach the reach), the first hold display The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be complicated. Note that these numerical values (percentages) are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable to have such a magnitude relationship.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) the number of reservations is 1" will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension with one hold. Then the fluctuation is started. When the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations of 1, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations of 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues the variable display), but the specific reach The probability of becoming a mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is regardless of the number of reservations. They are the same or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) the number of reservations is 4" will be described. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) The number of reservations 1", so it is omitted, but when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations 4, a shorter fluctuation time is selected than when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations 1. easy to be In addition, as described in the description of "(1) number of reservations 1", the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern has a specific reach mode) However, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is the same or a slight difference regardless of the number of reservations, and furthermore, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits. Although the final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed, the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the relationship between the game state and the final display mode will be described. First, the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension with one hold. Next, the variation is started, the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state (here, 7 ready-to-win) (the second decorative pattern is not in the ready-to-reach state and continues to be displayed in a variable manner), and finally, the first decoration. The pattern and the second decorative pattern are the final display mode indicating the winning mode, but as the final display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the pattern matching (for example, "777") is not limited to the latent mode. It is configured so that a mode transition pattern (for example, a "hidden" pattern) indicating transition to the mode can be displayed. Next, the time reduction game state will be explained. Description of the flow of variation is omitted because it is the same as the non-time-reduced game state. In the time shortening game state, the final display mode indicating the winning mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is only pattern matching (for example, "777"), and the mode transition pattern indicating transition to the hiding mode. is configured not to be displayed. In other words, the number of candidates for the final display mode is larger in both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the non-reduced time game state than in the reduced time game state. By configuring in this way, the hit from the non-time-reduced game state includes the transition to the latent mode to provide various game characteristics, and the hit from the time-reduced game state does not include the transition to the latent mode. , the game state can be recognized by the player. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (here again, 7 reach with high expectations is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-reduced time game state, and as an example, each appears 1/3 On the other hand, there are "787" and "777" in the time shortening game state, and as an example, it is configured to appear 1/2 each, and in the time shortening game state, by lowering the probability of being out, it becomes 7 reach. In this case, it is possible to restrict the medium pattern from coming off without reaching 7, so that the degree of expectation can be raised more than in the non-time shortening game state.

In the non-time-reduced gaming state, as a final display mode indicating a winning mode, the first decorative pattern may display a mode transition pattern indicating transition to the hiding mode, but the second decorative pattern may display the first decoration. The mode transition pattern displayed in the pattern may not be displayed, and it may be configured to indicate that the transition to the latent mode is performed in a different final display mode. In addition, it may be configured to display a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of even-numbered symbols, and furthermore, it may be configured so that the odd-numbered symbol combination has a higher probability of being in the probability fluctuation state in the latent mode than the even-numbered symbol combination. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the relationship between the game state and the warning display for hitting (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) will be described. First, the display of the hitting warning in the non-reduced time game state will be described. First, it is in a state where there is one hold on the first main game side and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, there is no display showing how to hit the player. Next, when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the first pending display on the second main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are updated, and furthermore, a left-handed warning is given. The display is performed until the end condition (for example, 10 seconds, the ball is entered into the first main game start gate A10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice along with the left-handed warning display (for example, "Left-handed please” x 3 times). The left-handed warning display can be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display. configured to not be displayed. It should be noted that even if the ball is entered in the first main game start gate A10 in the non-time-reduced game state, and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, it is left-handed. No warning is displayed. Next, a description will be given of how to play warning display in the time-reduced game state. First, there is one hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, a right hitting instruction display (“→→ right hitting→→”), which is a display showing the player how to hit, is displayed. The right hitting instruction display (“→→ right hitting →→”) is displayed in the time shortening game state, and does not depend on the update display of the pending number (for example, addition of the second pending display), and shortens the time. If it is in a game state, it will be continuously displayed. Next, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second pending display on the first main game side is updated (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed), and furthermore, , The right-handed warning display is performed until the end condition (for example, entering the ball in the second main game start port B10, etc.) is satisfied, and the right-handed warning display is combined with a voice warning (for example, "Right-handed please"). The right-handed warning display can be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display. configured to not be displayed. Note that even if a ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, a right-handed warning is issued. No display is performed. In addition, without displaying the hitting method warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) on the effect display device SG, an audio warning ("Please hit right", "Please hit left") is output. It may be configured to be

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols (re-change probability) will be described. First, the flow of production will be explained using the case of "blue hold change -> re-change (pseudo-continue)". First, there are three reserves on the first main game side, and the first reserve display is displayed in blue reserve, and is in a change stop state. Next, a change due to blue suspension is started (blue is displayed as a suspension display for the effect of the variation), and with "6" on the left column and "7" on the right column, a pseudo continuous suggestion As an advance notice, a pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol (here, translucent "NEXT") in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, non-transparent "NEXT") to be described later is translucent is displayed on the effect display device SG from top to bottom. is displayed by scrolling to Next, a pseudo-run suggestive symbol is scroll-displayed to approximately the center of the effect display device SG, and a pseudo-run symbol indicating that a pseudo-run will occur is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbols have stopped, next, all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, are re-flushed. ing. As the first decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols can be displayed, but as the second decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed. Next, the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) (in this example, blue hold change, red hold change) and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols will be described. As described above, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, a pseudo-continuous pattern that changes again occurs. Well, for example, with blue reserves with low expectations of winning, the probability of recurrence (probability of pseudo-runs) is low, and with red reserves with high expectations of winning, the probability of recurrence is high (that is, The probability of re-fluctuation may be configured as follows: red hold>blue hold). In the above description, the case where the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed from the display where the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same (not reachable) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. In addition to the configuration in which the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed from the same reach display, and the configuration in which the first decorative symbol can be re-varied (pseudo-continuous), the second decorative symbol is also re-variable (pseudo-continuous). ) possible configuration, a configuration in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is a specific symbol (for example, "7"), and the symbol columns in which the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed are the left column and the right column. There may be. Further, the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without scrolling display. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the probability that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed during the look-ahead effect display (re-variation probability) and the trigger variation (variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect) The relationship between the probability of symbol display (re-change probability) will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension of fluctuation with two holdings. Next, the change is started, and the background is displayed in semi-transparent black, which is the highly anticipated display mode of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when the high-expectation display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed, the pseudo-suggestive symbols and the pseudo-suggestive symbols may not be displayed. may be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the background is continuously displayed in translucent black, and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the trigger variation is started and the background is the normal background (not translucent black). Next, in a state in which "6" is displayed in the left column and "7" is displayed in the right column, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols are displayed by scrolling from top to bottom on the effect display device SG. Next, the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol is scroll-displayed to substantially the center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbols have stopped, next, all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, are re-flushed. ing. In this way, in the change related to the hold before the change related to the hold that triggered the occurrence of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger change), the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a highly expected display mode (here, a translucent black background) can be displayed, but the pseudo-continuous pattern is not displayed and re-variation (pseudo-continuous) does not occur, or when the look-ahead effect display mode is a high-expectation display mode, the look-ahead effect may be configured so that the probability of re-variation (pseudo-run) occurring due to the pseudo-running pattern being displayed is lower than when the display mode is low expectation, and in the trigger variation, the high expectation of the look-ahead effect Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed, a re-variation (pseudo-continuous) may occur, or the pseudo-continuous change may occur more than the variation related to the hold before the trigger variation. It may be configured such that the pattern is displayed and the probability of occurrence of re-variation (pseudo-run) increases. Further, the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without scrolling display. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, referring to FIG. 137, decorative patterns after power off and after power off (when RAM is not cleared, i.e., S1002→S1008→S1010→S1012→S1014→... in FIG. 5). I will explain the relationship between First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and ``8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)'' is displayed, just like before the power was turned off. there is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after the power is turned off, etc. Here, "861" is displayed. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, Stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. there is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, (C), which is a modification of (A), will be described. First, it is staying in stage A (during suspension of fluctuation), and the first decoration pattern is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, when the power is restored from the power interruption, the stage A set as the default stage is displayed. , 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" are displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. In this case, only the first decorative pattern is changed. It returns with the default display of the pattern "2 (ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)".

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship between the decorative designs after power-off and after power-off recovery (in the case of RAM clear; S1002→S1004→S1006→ . . . in FIG. 5) will be described. First, (A) will be described. First, since it is staying in stage A (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power failure, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. , 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after the power is turned off, etc. Here, "331" is displayed. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power failure, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. ), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "331" in numerals.

In this way, when the RAM is cleared (RAM is cleared and power is restored), a predetermined display mode (here, stage A , the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are both "331"), which makes it easier for the player, game staff, etc. to grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

The default display of the first decorative pattern when the RAM is cleared, ``3 (Penguin), 3 (Penguin), 1 (Chick)'' may be displayed only when the RAM is cleared, or may be displayed during normal game play. However, for example, it may be configured to display as a premium effect in which the big win is almost guaranteed. Also, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is set to the same display mode as the default display mode when the power is restored (the same display mode as (C) in FIG. 137), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decoration pattern is set to "2 ( ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)", and the second decorative pattern may be displayed as a number "246".

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, reach voice, which is the production at the time of reach (announcement that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by the sound generated when reach is established) and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols (probability of recurrence) I will explain the relationship between In addition, the expected hit rate of reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot. In addition, it should be supplemented in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-fluctuation due to the reach voice when the reach is established in the fluctuation that develops into a predetermined SP reach after the reach is established. First, (A) will be explained. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the sound of "reach" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to be high. Next, (B) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the sound of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to middle. Next, (C) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the sound of "development" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but develops into a super ready-to-win effect, and the super ready-to-win effect is displayed. In this way, when the ready-to-win state is established and the "development" ready-to-win voice is generated, the probability of re-fluctuation is 0, and the super ready-to-win effect is directly developed without re-fluctuation. Next, (D) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "Gekiatsu" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "very hot" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to be low.

In this way, the more reach voices with high expectations for winning, the lower the probability of re-fluctuation (pseudo-run), but some of the reach voices with high expectations for hitting occur In this case, the reach voice of "development" is configured so that re-fluctuation (pseudo continuation) does not occur. In addition, even if some of the reach voices with high hit expectations (for example, “development” reach voices) When some reach voices (e.g. "development" reach voices) occur, the re-change probability is set to high (e.g., the re-change probability is higher than when "chance") may

In other words, the hit expectation by the reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot, and the probability of re-fluctuation (pseudo consecutive) by the reach voice is
(1) development (including non-occurrence)<extreme excitement<chance<reach (2) extreme excitement<chance<development≦reach, it is possible to configure an order different from the hit expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display mode of the decorative symbols in the all-rotation effect will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Then the fluctuations start and reach. Next, the characters "Full rotation" are displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device SG, and the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbols are aligned (for example, "777" or "888 ” etc.), scrolling display is performed at a slower speed than normal fluctuations (for example, the state in the second figure). As described above, the first decorative symbols can be scroll-displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned. , the left, middle, and right columns are individually variably displayed in a state in which the patterns are not aligned, and the speed does not slow down (=maintains a constant speed). Next, substantially at the same time as the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which only numbers are aligned. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also be variably displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned (for example, "777" or "888") so as to be synchronized with the first decorative pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the variation mode of decorative symbols for each stage will be described. First, stage A will be described. In stage A, when the variation starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scroll display that moves from top to bottom in the display area of the effect display device SG, and the second decorative pattern is displayed on the spot (the second A variable display is performed by a scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). Next, stage B will be described. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is horizontally rotated on the spot to change the pattern. A variable display is performed by a scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). Thus, since the first decorative pattern is a pattern that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the player is prevented from getting bored by changing the variation mode depending on the stage, and the second decorative pattern is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since it is a pattern, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the details of the display contents of the decorative symbols during variation will be described. First, (A) will be described. (A) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the fluctuation pattern to be a reach. First, at stage B, fluctuation is stopped. Next, the variation is started, and the pattern rows of the left, middle and right columns of the first decorative pattern are varied in a variation mode in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally, and the pattern of the second decorative pattern is changed. In each of the left, middle, and right symbol columns, the symbols fluctuate in a vertical scrolling manner on the spot. In each pattern row of the first decorative pattern, the patterns are regularly changed in order of "1→2→3→...→7→8→1→...", and in the second decorative pattern, No matter what the variation of the first decoration pattern is, the predetermined pattern variation is uniformly performed, and is ``275''→“864”→“387”→“641”→“728”→“413”. →“156”→“532”→“275”→ . Next, at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established at "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the timing when the fluctuating "6" is positioned in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). , "275" is positioned within the sub-region as the second decorative symbol that is fluctuating. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the patterns in the left row and the right row are different, and reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be described. (B) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in a variation pattern that does not result in a reach but a loss. First, at stage B, fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right pattern rows of the first decorative pattern, the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally (high-speed fluctuation). 2. In each of the left, middle, and right pattern rows of the decorative pattern, the patterns are fluctuated in a fluctuating mode of vertical scrolling on the spot. Next, it is the timing just before the left column stops. At this time (for a moment), "868" is displayed (however, since the right symbol is fluctuating at high speed, it is not a ready-to-win). The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at normal speed (the second decorative pattern fluctuates only at almost normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at low speed during full rotation production), at this time (for a moment However), "864" is displayed. Next, it is time to stop the left column, the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped), the middle and right columns of the first decorative pattern are in high speed fluctuation, and at this time (in an instant ), but "168" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the stop of the right column. , and the middle row is in the process of high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "165" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right pattern. The middle row is in the process of high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "166" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "728" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the end of the variable time, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative pattern, and "6" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right column, The middle row is during low speed fluctuation, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, a fluctuation stop command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S to indicate the end of the fluctuation time (also for stopping display of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern), Both the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop changing (fixed stop) at "126".

In the first decorative pattern, from just before the left and right columns stop (temporary stop) to stop (temporary stop), or from just before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop), The pattern is changed in the order that is arranged continuously in advance to stop the fluctuation (fixed stop), but in the second decorative pattern, from just before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop), the fluctuation The pattern displayed immediately before the stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stop pattern in an instant, and the variation stops (fixed stop). In this example, in the first decorative pattern, from just before the left column stop (temporary stop) to the left column stop (temporary stop), the left column is changed to "8 → 1", and the right column stop ( Temporary stop) to the right column stop (temporary stop), the right column is changed from "5 to 6", and from just before the fluctuation stop (definite stop) to the fluctuation stop The columns are changed from "1 to 2". In the second decorative pattern, since it continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stops, the pattern displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is instantly changed to the final stop symbol "126". , the left column is changed to "3→1", the middle column is changed to "6→2", and the right column is changed to "2→6". However, since the patterns are displayed at random during the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, the pattern displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) and the final stop pattern may coincidentally continue.

In addition, the pattern arrangement pattern of the second decorative pattern may be regular and continuous. ·” may be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right columns are displayed differently. Specifically, if it is a specification to display with one shift, the left column starts with "1" and is "1 → 2 → 3 → ...", and the middle column starts with "2" and is "2 → 3 → 4". →...", the right column starts with "3" and changes like "3→4→5→...", and changes to the final stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop).

Thus, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the pattern (final stop pattern) displayed at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop) are continuous or continuous. In many cases, in the second decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the pattern (final stop pattern) displayed at the time of stopping the fluctuation (fixed stop) are not continuous or are not continuous. There are many things.

Next, the relationship between the pseudo-continuous symbols, the developmental symbols, and the pseudo-continuous symbols and the developmental symbols will be described. In the following description, the configuration for displaying the first decorative pattern, the first reserved display, etc. during super reach is shown, but as described above, the first decorative pattern, the first reserved display, etc. are displayed during super reach. A configuration in which no display is made may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design when re-fluctuation is executed. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". The first decorative design is composed of characters and numerical designs, and the second decorative design is composed only of numerical designs. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. Next, the first decorative design and the second decorative design both display "6" in the left design and the right design to form a reach. , Pseudo-continuous variation) will be executed or not, the translucent "NEXT" pattern ("re-fluctuation suggestion pattern", "pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern (pseudo-continuous suggestion effect)") will move from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen. It is displayed moving. Next, when the re-fluctuation is executed, the non-transmissive "NEXT" pattern (also called "re-fluctuation pattern" or "pseudo-continuous pattern") is placed approximately in the center of the liquid crystal screen instead of the translucent "NEXT" pattern. Is displayed. At this time, no pattern suggesting re-fluctuation is displayed in the second decorative pattern display area (sub-area). In the first decorative design display area, after the non-transmissive "NEXT" design is displayed, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design start the design variation again (the first pattern before the design variation is started again). 1 The stop situation of the decorative pattern is also called "temporary stop"). At this time, since the number of reservations is still 3, it can be seen that one symbol variation is shown as if the symbol is varied a plurality of times. Next, in the symbol variation performed again, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach again with "7", and then execute the super reach effect, and since the variation was a loss, the first decorative symbol, the second Both of the decorative symbols are determined and stopped at a reach-losing symbol ("717") that is not double. In addition, during the Super Reach effect, the battle effect of friendly characters and enemy characters is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decoration pattern, only the number pattern is displayed in small size in the upper right corner of the screen ( Also referred to as a "retreat display mode"), the player is made to pay attention to the battle performance, and after the battle performance is completed, decoration patterns composed of characters and number patterns are displayed in the same manner as at the start of variation. It should be noted that the pseudo consecutive suggestive symbols are displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when specific symbols are displayed and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both display "6" in the left pattern and the right pattern to form a ready-to-win state, and furthermore, in the first decorative pattern display area, it is expected to develop into a super ready-to-win effect. After "development" or "development!!!", which is a specific pattern (also called a development pattern), is displayed, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. It should be noted that when the specific symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area, the symbol indicating development of the super ready-to-win effect is not displayed in the second decorative symbol display area. Also, "development" and "development!!!" are different symbols, but even if either one is displayed, the same development destination, super ready-to-win effect, can be executed. In addition, "development" and "development !!!" have different expectations for winning, and when "development !!!" degree is high. In addition, multiple types of super reach effects are provided, for example, super reach effects with different characters have different expectations of winning, and super reach effects are configured in multiple stages such as the first half of super reach and the latter half of super reach. As a development pattern for super reach production, not only a pattern that goes through the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach, but also a pattern that displays the second half of super reach without going through the first half of super reach is provided. good too. Therefore, when "development" or "development!!!" ("development"→super ready-to-win effect A and "development!!!"→super ready-to-win effect A have different expectations for big wins). Also, in the case where the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach are displayed, the first half of Super Reach is displayed when "Development" is displayed and when "Development!!!" is displayed. However, it is also possible to configure so that the ratio of the second half of the super reach is different. Of course, according to the type of development pattern ("development", "development!!!", etc.), it may be configured such that the possibility of developing into a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit among a plurality of types of super reach is different. In addition, a low-expectation super reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super reach performance by Kirin described later) and a high-expectation super reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, a battle production that is a super reach production ) may be provided in plurality.

As a supplement, here, the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element (for example, numbers) and the third element (for example, characters) at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, under certain circumstances that occur depending on the production pattern (for example, during super reach, during movable parts, during probability change promotion, during error screen display.Here is super reach.) Only the first element (number) It is configured.

Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when advanced symbols are displayed corresponding to the advance notice type and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, the notice display during the pattern change ("Comment notice" that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit with letters in the oval frame, "Timer" that displays the time until the production that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit is displayed Notice”, and “next notice” indicating that the change will result in super reach) are performed. First, when "chance", which is a "comment notice", is displayed, next, a specific symbol "development" indicating development to a super ready-to-win effect is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. On the other hand, when "00:10:00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur in 10 seconds), which is a "timer notice", is displayed, it is a specific symbol indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop. After "Development!!!" is displayed, a super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "next time SP ready-to-win", which is "next time notice", is displayed, the specific pattern is not displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "comment notice", "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", and specific symbols are not displayed after "next notice". is done. It should be noted that here, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "comment notice" and "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", respectively, but this is not the case. "Development!!!" can be displayed after "Comment notice", and "Development" can be displayed after "Timer notice". may be higher than the percentage of "timer notice" followed by "expansion!!!" The rate at which "development" is displayed after is high. In addition, there is a difference in the degree of expectation for the jackpot between the aforementioned "development" and "development!!!" ” also has a difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is as follows: comment notice < timer notice < next notice.

Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is produced when different display modes are performed for the same notice type. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, a notice display {"comment notice" ("chance" and "great heat!!" are both comment notices) that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with letters in an oval frame] is performed during the pattern change. will be First, when "chance" is displayed, next, "development", which is a specific pattern indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop, is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. On the other hand, when "Super heat!!" is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the specific symbol "development!!!" is displayed to indicate that the super ready-to-win effect will develop. In this way, "chance" is associated with "development", and "very hot!!" is associated with "development!!!". It should be noted that here, it is assumed that "chance" is associated with "development", and that "hot heat!!" is associated with "development!!!", respectively. It is not limited, and it is configured so that "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance" and "development" can be displayed after "hot heat!!", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance". The percentage of "development!!!" displayed after "hot heat!!" The percentage of “development” displayed after “chance” may be higher than “chance”. In addition, as mentioned above, there is a difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit between “development” and “development !!!” !” has a higher expectation of a big hit than “Chance”.

Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, the first pending display changes to blue and the decoration pattern is stopped at "861". Next, in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension (the suspension that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect. Here, the blue suspension display.), "development" is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the pattern combination of the decorative symbols at the time of stoppage of the variation is a chance number look-ahead consecutive number (here, "123"), "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension. , a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In addition, when the chance look-ahead occurs, a special effect is generated around the fixed and stopped first decorative pattern to make it easier to recognize that the chance look-ahead has occurred, and the special effect is generated for the second decorative pattern. It may be configured so as not to In this way, "development" is displayed after the pending change effect is displayed as the prefetch effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance eye is displayed as the prefetch effect. there is In addition, here, after the pending change production, "development" is displayed, and after the chance eye look ahead, "development !!!" is displayed. "Development!!!" is displayed even after the pending change effect, and the percentage of "development!!!" may be high, and in this case, "development" may be displayed after the chance lookahead, and the percentage of "development" displayed after the chance lookahead is higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed after the pending change production " The rate at which "development" is displayed may be high. As mentioned above, there is a difference in the expectation of a big hit between "development" and "development !!!" Expectations for the big win are high. It should be noted that, in this example, the correspondence between the pending change production and the development pattern ("development", "development !!!") in the chance eye look-ahead was explained, but if it is a look-ahead production, even if it is another production Well, for example, it can also be applied to "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone", which are background change effects. In addition, in this example, the difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit in one look-ahead effect (holding change effect or look-ahead of the chance) was explained, but whether or not a plurality of types of look-ahead effects were being executed at the same time Depending on the number of pre-reading effects present (complex number of pre-reading effects), it may be configured such that the corresponding relationship with the development pattern (“development” “development !!!”) is different. For example, when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is executed, the development pattern in the trigger fluctuation is better when the hold change effect and the chance eye lookahead (two types of prefetch effect) are executed is likely to be displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is being executed, the percentage of “development !!!” type) is being executed, it may be configured so that the percentage of “development !!!” is displayed is higher. ) is executed, even if the percentage of “development” displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being executed is higher good. In addition, similar to the development pattern, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also a pseudo-continuous pattern (“NEXT”) depending on whether or not multiple types of pre-reading effects are being executed at the same time or the number of pre-reading effects being executed at the same time (complex number of pre-reading effects). "NEXT!!!") may be configured to have a different correspondence relationship. For example, when the pending change effect and the chance look-ahead (two types of the look-ahead effect) are executed than when only the pending change effect (one type of the look-ahead effect) is executed, the pseudo-continuous trigger fluctuation If the pattern is easy to display, or if only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the percentage of “NEXT !!!” It may be configured so that the percentage of “NEXT!!!” displayed is higher when two types) are being executed. The percentage of “NEXT” displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being performed is higher than the rate of “NEXT” being displayed when the type) is being performed. good too.

Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different display mode is performed for the same look-ahead effect type, resulting in a super ready-to-win effect. First, the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative design starts design fluctuation. Here, a new hold display ("trigger hold display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the pending change effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects). Next, when the trigger suspension display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension, and a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger pending display changes from blue to red, the symbol variation associated with the trigger pending is "development!!!" is displayed, and a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, after the blue color is displayed in the pending change effect, "development" is displayed, and after the red color is displayed in the pending change effect, "development!!!" is displayed. . Here, it is assumed that "Development" is displayed after blue, and "Development!!!" is displayed after red, respectively. In this case, the ratio of "Development!!!" displayed after red and "Development!!!" displayed after blue may be higher than the ratio of "Development!!!" displayed after blue. In some cases, "development" may be displayed after red, and "development" may be displayed more frequently after blue than "development" is displayed after red. There is also a difference in the degree of expectation for a big win between blue and red, which are the display modes of the pending change effect, and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in red than in blue. In this example, the description was made using the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”) in the pending change effect, but if it is a look-ahead effect, it does not have to be a pending change effect. For example, it can also be applied to background change effects such as "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone".

Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing display transition when developing to the same super ready-to-win effect via different displays. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after the specific symbol "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, which indicates that the super reach production will develop, the low expectation super reach production (super reach first half) with a relatively low jackpot expectation ), an effect in which the giraffe destroys the medium symbols is executed, and a reach-losing symbol combination (“656”) is displayed in the low-expectation super-reach effect. In addition, during the low-expectation super reach, the first decoration pattern is displayed only in the number pattern, but it may be the first decoration pattern composed of the number pattern and the character pattern. Next, a high-expectation super ready-to-win production (second half of super ready-to-win) with a relatively high degree of expectation for big hit is executed. Here, even if any of "development" and "development!!!" !”, the rate of development to the high-expectation-level super-reach production is different. is displayed, the high-expectation super-reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% when "development" is displayed and 50% when "development !!!" It will return to the normal screen without developing into a reach effect.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing the display transition when developing into the super ready-to-win effect via the button effect. First, the decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design) are in the process of changing. Next, the decoration pattern forms a reach, and a button effect is executed that enables the player to operate the sub-input button SB. At the time of the button presentation, the first decoration pattern is only numbers, the left pattern is displayed at the left end of the liquid crystal screen, the right pattern is displayed at the right end of the liquid crystal screen, and a plurality of patterns that can be selected by operating the player's sub-input button SB are displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen. The pattern is displayed in a circular shape. The multiple patterns include "6", which is a winning pattern, "development" and "development !!!", which indicate that it will be a super reach effect, "5", which is a losing pattern, and "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern. is displayed. When a plurality of patterns rotate in a circle and the sub-input button SB can be operated, a button image with "PUSH" written is displayed in the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen, and the sub-input button SB is operated. Taking this as an opportunity, one pattern is displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, although not shown, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. When the sub-input button SB is not operated, after the valid period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, "development" is displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. The symbols displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated are determined in advance by preliminary lottery of the sub-control board S performed at the start of fluctuation.

Note that the production in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before developing into a super ready-to-win effect (=up to the stage where the illustrated development pattern is displayed), the first decorative pattern is not displayed only with a number pattern, but is composed of a number pattern and a character pattern. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (e.g., large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the percentage of symbols to be stopped may differ. When is displayed, the percentage of symbols other than losing symbols such as "NEXT", "Development", "Development!!!", and winning symbols will be displayed higher than when small button images are displayed. may
(3) Depending on the type of button image (e.g., large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of displayed developed patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns may differ. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the percentage of displayed development patterns is higher than when a small button image is displayed, the percentage of “development!!!” It is also possible to set a high percentage of symbols to be displayed, a high percentage of "NEXT!!!" to be displayed, and the like.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. In addition, it is possible to have a pattern in which a button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). Often, in this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing. "Development", "Development!!!", winning symbols, etc.) may be displayed at a higher rate. Furthermore, even if the ratio of the developed symbols displayed is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed can increase the percentage of “Development!!!” displayed).
(5) Pseudo-continuous symbols may include not only "NEXT" but also multiple types such as "NEXT!!!". !” may be configured to increase the expectation of a big hit, or “NEXT!!!” may be displayed in an array pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle. An arrangement pattern in which "NEXT!!!" is displayed at the same time may be provided.
(6) There may be a plurality of types of arrangement patterns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circular shape, and when a plurality of types are provided, fluctuations with high expectations for big hits (for example, big hit fluctuations, super reach effects) variation, etc.), the ratio of displaying an arrangement pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case of a variation with a low degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, fluctuation without reach, loss, etc.). good. For example, an arrangement pattern with a high probability of winning a big hit may be an arrangement pattern with no missing symbols (for example, an arrangement pattern displayed as “6 (jackpot pattern), development, development, NEXT, development !!!”) or “development ” instead of “Development!!!”・Arrangement pattern in which "Development!!!" is displayed, etc.).

As in (3), the proportion at which the development pattern is displayed varies depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change By configuring the display ratio of the pseudo-continuous symbols to be different according to the change, if the display mode of the advance notice of the change is highly expected, the possibility of displaying the advanced symbols and the pseudo-continuous symbols increases, and the player can be configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit can be easily grasped.

Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is obtained in different effect stages (also referred to as effect modes). First, the production stage A will be described in detail. In the performance stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a ready-to-win effect is formed, and after a specific symbol "development" indicating development to a super ready-to-win effect is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. In the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after forming the reach, the super reach production is executed as it is (that is, the specific symbol "development" indicating that the reach is developed is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the production stage After displaying a "development (an aspect in which the inside of a Chinese character is hollowed out as shown)" different from A, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ (is the same), and the first decoration is displayed according to the production stage. Although an advanced design can be displayed in the design, the second decorative design is configured so as not to display an advanced design.

Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing display transition when re-fluctuation is executed in different production stages. First, the production stage A will be described in detail. In the performance stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after a reach is formed and the "NEXT" symbol indicating that the re-variation is to be executed is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. In the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after the symbol combination "678" (order) indicating that the re-variation is executed in the first decorative symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped), the symbol variation is started again, or the reach is formed, after displaying the "NEXT (a form in which the inside of the alphabet is hollowed out as shown)" different from the production stage A, the pattern variation is started again. It should be noted that, depending on which production stage re-fluctuation was performed, if re-fluctuation is performed twice {variation start → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re- Variation)} and when re-variation is performed three times {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation)} You may make it differ from the big-hit expectation degree of . For example, in production stage A (for example, the daytime stage or a non-predictive stage other than the angel zone), the average jackpot expectation is 5% when re-variation is performed twice, and re-variation is performed 3 times. The average jackpot expectation is 25% when the The expected jackpot is 40% on average when the is executed twice, and the expected jackpot is 50% when the revariation is executed three times, with a difference of 10% (a difference of 1.25 times ). The difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation for the execution of a special game) is obtained by subtracting it in percentage display, by dividing the degree of expectation for a big hit (1/N), or the like. Also, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage (production stage A, production stage B), but the display form of the second decorative pattern is the same, and the first decorative pattern is the "NEXT" pattern. Although it can be displayed, the second decorative design may be configured so that the "NEXT" design is not displayed. It should be noted that both production stage A and production stage B have been mainly explained as being non-predictive stages in non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state (game state similar to the above-mentioned daytime stage), but are not limited to this. , production stage A is a non-prefetch stage in a non-probability variable game state and non-time-reduced game state (for example, the daytime stage described above), production stage B is a non-probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state (for example, The production stage A and the production stage B are configured as the above-mentioned night stage), and both the production stage A and the production stage B are configured as a look-ahead stage in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the production stage A and the production stage B are both the probability fluctuation game state and It is also possible to configure as a non-prefetching stage in the time reduction game state, and if a plurality of production stages are provided, it is possible to apply the production form shown in this example regardless of the game state.

Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a translucent "NEXT" pattern, which is a re-change suggesting pattern that suggests that a reach is formed and that re-change is to be executed, is displayed. When the translucent "NEXT" pattern is moved from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen and re-fluctuation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" pattern is displayed and then pattern fluctuation is started again. The pattern variation is performed again, the ready-to-win state is formed again, and this time, "development" indicating that the super ready-to-win effect is executed instead of the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. After that, the super ready-to-win effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped at the ready-to-win losing symbol ("717"). As shown in this figure, while it is possible to display a specific symbol (eg, "development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol (eg, "NEXT"), a pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed after displaying a specific symbol. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed. In addition, the ratio of specific symbols to be displayed depends on whether or not pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed (=whether or not re-fluctuation is performed), the number of times pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed (=number of re-fluctuations), etc. can be different. For example, the greater the number of re-changes, the easier it is for the specific pattern to be displayed (= the higher the percentage of specific patterns displayed without displaying the lost pattern), and the greater the number of re-changes , which has a high expectation for a big hit, may be displayed at a higher rate even if the specific symbols are displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 154, even when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (during the display of pseudo continuous symbols and during the display of advanced symbols), the second decorative symbols are displayed in the left row, the middle row, and the right row. The variable display is continued in all, and further, the variable display of the second decorative symbols may be continued in all of the left, middle, and right columns even during super reach.

Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing display transition when the first decorative patterns are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative pattern is stopped at "861", but the left pattern (elephant) and the middle pattern (giraffe), and the middle pattern (giraffe) and the right pattern (chick) are displayed in duplicate. At this time, the middle pattern (giraffe) is placed behind the LCD screen (the player side is in front) from the left pattern (elephant) and right pattern (chick), and the left pattern (elephant) and right pattern (chick) are partly It is hidden. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a reach is formed, and the medium pattern is displayed as a low-speed fluctuation display. At this time, the middle pattern is arranged in front of the liquid crystal screen than the left and right patterns forming the reach. In this figure, the chick ("1") as the medium symbol is displayed at low speed and does not stop, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) is displayed at low speed and stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, a super ready-to-win effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped with a reach-to-loss pattern (“717”). When displaying the reach-losing pattern, the middle pattern (chick) is placed behind the LCD screen from the left pattern (lion) and the right pattern (lion), just like before the start of the fluctuation, and part of the middle pattern (chick) is hidden. As for the second decorative symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not displayed redundantly at any timing. In addition, even if a development pattern ("development" or "development!!!") is displayed instead of a pseudo-continuation symbol, the relationship between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol will be displayed when the pseudo-continuation symbol is displayed. It can be the same as when The display mode may be a display mode in stage C or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high chance of winning). In other words, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed in stage A or stage B but may be displayed in stage C, or it may be a display mode that can be displayed in stage C. It may be a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high degree of expectation when reach is performed) rather than in a short-term variation).

Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative pattern is gradually increased from low speed to high speed pattern fluctuation (low speed→medium speed→high speed). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern has a constant pattern fluctuation speed, and is always a high-speed pattern fluctuation. Next, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern become high speed, and when the reach is formed by the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the middle pattern in the first decorative pattern becomes the low speed pattern fluctuation, and the second decorative pattern becomes the second decorative pattern. In the 2 decorative patterns, the middle pattern is a high-speed pattern variation. After that, during execution of the super reach effect, the left pattern and the right pattern in which both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern form the reach are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle pattern is at high speed. Pattern is changing. After the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the variation was a loss, so the game is fixed and stopped with a ready-to-win losing symbol (“686”). In this figure, while the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, only the middle pattern is changed while forming the ready-to-win in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. During execution of medium or specific super ready-to-win production, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be varied. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also have a plurality of fluctuation speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern is less likely to change in fluctuation speed than the first decorative pattern. For example, low speed is not used in the second decorative pattern, but medium speed is used (in addition, low speed, medium speed, and high speed are used in the first decorative pattern). In addition, it is possible to configure the second decorative pattern so as not to temporarily stop in the middle, specifically, it is configured to always be at high speed or stop (fixed stop), or high speed, medium speed and stop (fixed stop). and the like.

Here, the pseudo consecutive symbols and development symbols in the time shortening game state are supplemented. In the time shortening game state, it may be constructed such that the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advanced symbols can be displayed, but it is more preferable to construct so that the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advanced symbols cannot be displayed. This is because, in the time-reduced game state, the variation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time-reduced game state), and there are fewer effects suggesting a big win within one variation. When displaying pseudo-continuous symbols or advanced symbols, since the selection has a relatively long fluctuation time, the interval between big wins (the period from the end of one big win to the start of the next big win) is lengthened. As a result, the speed at which the number of balls increases during the consecutive villas will be slowed down. In addition, in this way, in the time-saving game state, a short variation time is likely to be selected, and the effect amount is also small, so the first decorative pattern itself and the variation mode of the first decorative pattern may be simple, and the first element. It is preferable that it consists only of (numbers).

Supplementally, in the sixth embodiment, the second decorative pattern is always displayed during the variable display, and the fixed stop is always shown. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize, and in this case, the second decorative pattern is not necessarily fixed and stopped.

In FIGS. 143 to 156, the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side have been described, but the first pending display on the second main game side has been described. And it may be configured to display the second pending display on the second main game side as well.

Further, in FIGS. 143 to 156, the description has been made using the example of the ready-to-win state in the second decorative design, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the second decorative design does not turn into the ready-to-reach state (always fluctuating until the final stop). .

Based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and the concepts listed below can be added to these concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments, as well as the combination and separation of these listed concepts (higher-level concepts). may

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
In the normal game state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of holdings of the second holding can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. is viewable and
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first reserved number image and the second reserved number image can be displayed on the effect display section in both the normal game state and the specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reservations that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied Display of a variation-compatible image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is performed,
In the normal game state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image can be displayed, and when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it does not.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the second effect pattern and the first reserved image are configured so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect display part is configured so that the second effect pattern and the first reserved number image are not displayed in an overlapping manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first pending number indicating the pending number of the first pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member while the variable display is stopped or during the variable display,
a volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit when the volume level can be adjusted;
The volume adjustment image, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern, and the display priority of the second effect pattern is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern,
the volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first reserved image or the second reserved image, and the display priority of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is the first reserved image or the second reserved image is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the fluctuation display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect pattern do not overlap,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the sound volume adjustment image and the pattern for second performance do not overlap even during the variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image when the display mode of the image is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the first reserved number immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image will be in the specific display mode as the final display mode is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reservation number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start It is a pachinko machine that features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (17) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols that can be displayed after the display mode becomes the special display mode is larger than the total number of combination patterns.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (18) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second start port,
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the pending image movement effect is started during execution of the pending image generation effect, the pending image generation effect and the pending image moving effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image generation effect being executed, and when execution of the pending image generation effect is started during execution of the pending image movement effect, the pending image movement effect and the pending image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image movement effect being executed;
When a new variable display starts during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image Execute a second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image after the execution is finished,
When there is a new entry in the first start opening or the second start opening during the execution of the second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image, the first reservation number image or the second A pachinko game machine characterized in that the first update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the two reservation number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (19) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (20) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be different display modes,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (21) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
In the normal game state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of holdings of the second holding can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. is viewable and
In both the normal game state and the specific game state, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be displayed on the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (22) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A first area and a second area different from the first area are provided as game areas in which game balls can flow down,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reservations that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied Display of a variation-compatible image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is performed,
In the normal game state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image can be displayed, and when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image is displayed. is configured not to
A first notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot toward the first area can be displayed on the effect display unit,
A second notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the first pending number image is updated in the specific game state, it is configured to display the second notification image,
The second notification image can be displayed overlapping with the first production pattern, while the second production pattern, the first reserved image, the second reserved image, the first reserved number image, the second reserved number image and is configured not to display duplicates,
Regardless of whether the first reserved number image is updated in the specific game state, the image should be different from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be shot toward the second area side. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a special notification image for notifying that a special notification image can be displayed on the effect display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (23) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the second effect pattern and the first reserved image are configured so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect display part is configured so that the second effect pattern and the first reserved number image are not displayed in an overlapping manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (24) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). Second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member while the variable display is stopped or during the variable display,
a volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit when the volume level can be adjusted;
The volume adjustment image, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern, and the display priority of the second effect pattern is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern,
the volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first reserved image or the second reserved image, and the display priority of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is the first reserved image or the second reserved image is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the fluctuation display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect pattern do not overlap,
It is configured so that the volume adjustment image and the pattern for the second effect do not overlap even during the variable display,
The total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal game state is configured to be greater than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (25) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display content is displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The suspension change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information under the condition that the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first suspensions remain. In the case, while the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (26) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image when the display mode of the image is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the first reserved number immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image will be in the specific display mode as the final display mode is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
When the first hold number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first retention number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal game state is configured to be greater than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (27) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state It is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbols that can be displayed after the special display mode as the display mode,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect pattern corresponding to the first effect mode, and the second display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect pattern corresponding to the second effect mode, are different. It is configured to be a display mode,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the first rendering mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the first rendering mode, the specific first rendering pattern, which is the first display mode, can be variably displayed. is configured to
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second performance mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second performance mode, the pattern for the specific first performance, which is the second display mode, can be variably displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (28) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The suspension change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information under the condition that the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first suspensions remain. In the case, while the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second start port,
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the pending image movement effect is started during execution of the pending image generation effect, the pending image generation effect and the pending image moving effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image generation effect being executed, and when execution of the pending image generation effect is started during execution of the pending image movement effect, the pending image movement effect and the pending image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image movement effect being executed;
When a new variable display starts during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image Execute a second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image after the execution is finished,
When there is a new entry in the first start port or the second start port during the execution of the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first hold number image or the second The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the two reservation number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (29) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured differently depending on the contents of the pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (30) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be different depending on whether the type of is a look-ahead performance A or a look-ahead performance B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (31) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is relatively higher when M types of prefetching effects are executed among the types of prefetching effects. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (32) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
In a situation where a specific hold, which is a first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, exists, a look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the specific hold can be executed by the effect display unit,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. It is constructed so that the probability of displaying the special display mode in the variable display related to the holding which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is relatively higher when M types of look-ahead effect are executed out of the types of look-ahead effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (33) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed during the certain effect period,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
The probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the first operation promoting effect is displayed when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed when the second operation promoting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing at which the 2-operation promotion effect is displayed is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (34) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (35) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of development performances that are performances to be executed after establishment of ready-to-win, and has a plurality of types of post-reach performances that can occur after establishment of ready-to-win and before execution of development performance,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the probability of displaying a special display mode after the occurrence of the after-reach performance is different depending on which of the plurality of kinds of the after-reach performance has occurred. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (36) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes dependent upon determining the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (37) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period differs according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (38) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, the specific display mode A is selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern from among the plurality of types of specific display modes, or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is selected as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the type of
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the symbol for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period differs according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (39) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is relatively higher when M types of prefetching effects are executed among the types of prefetching effects. and
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (40) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display part, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-change is executed, or whether the re-change is executed It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. It is constructed so that the probability of displaying the special display mode in the variable display related to the holding which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is relatively higher when M types of look-ahead effect are executed out of the types of look-ahead effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (41) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The probability that the specific display mode is displayed within the certain effect period is different depending on the number of times it is displayed as the mode,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (42) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display part, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-change is executed, or whether the re-change is executed It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (43) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
Expectation level of execution of special game when special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within one rendering period in first rendering mode and special display mode within one rendering period in first rendering mode is displayed N+1 times, the difference in the execution expectation of the special game is the execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a given effect period in the second effect mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the degree of expectation and the degree of expectation of execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N+1 times within one performance period in the second performance mode,
It has a plurality of types of development performances that are performances to be executed after establishment of ready-to-win, and has a plurality of types of post-reach performances that can occur after establishment of ready-to-win and before execution of development performance,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed after the occurrence of the after-reach performance, or the probability of displaying the special display mode, according to which of the plurality of types of after-reach performance has occurred. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (44) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first design for effect, the special display mode A among the plurality of types of special display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first design for effect, or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the special display mode B among the types of special display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the special display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are different,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the second effect mode are the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entering ball determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance ball entrance determination means MJ11-C10 1st major winning entrance determination Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning entrance ball determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Reservation control means MJ31 Reservation digestion control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means MJ32 Symbol reservation means MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Winner lottery means MN11-A First main game lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game lottery table MN11-B Second main game lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination means , MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game progress means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First and Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B Second main Game start gate electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means, MP2 2t-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory opening timer MP30 special game control means, MP31 condition determination means MP32 special game content determination means, MP32ta special game content reference table MP33 special game execution means, MP33-C first and second 2 big winning mouth electric accessory opening and closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability variation end condition determination means MP52 Time saving end condition determination means MP52c Time saving number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary Game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer MH Award ball payout determination means A First main game peripheral A10 Second 1 main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol holding display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device , B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start opening ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start opening electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display area B21h 2nd Main game pattern holding display unit, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st big winning opening, C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device C11d 1st big winning opening Electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning opening C21s 2nd large winning opening winning detection device, C21d 2nd large winning opening electric accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start opening H11s auxiliary game start opening ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game design display device H21g auxiliary game design Display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative pattern display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta lottery table for design variation content determination SM21ta-2 decorative design performance table, SM21b: design related information temporary storage means SM21t-1: first design change time management timer; SM22: design reservation information display control means;
SM22b Design pending information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information Temporary storage means SM25 Ready-to-win effect display control means SM25n Ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25b Ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM27 Right hitting display control means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Effects display means (sub-sub control unit) SS10 Sub-information Transmission/Reception Control Means SS20 Image Display Control Means SS21b Image Display Related Information Temporary Storage Means SG Effect Display Device SG10 Display Area SG11 Decorative Design Display Area SG12 First Reservation Display Section SG13 Second Reservation Display Section KH Prize Ball Payout Control Board KE Prize ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied; ,
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition related to a certain first reservation is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and based on the result of the right or wrong judgment, the first a first game content determining means for determining a stationary display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
First identification information display control means for controlling to stop display of the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information on the first identification information display section in accordance with determination by the first game content determination means. When,
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for, when the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, temporarily storing the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied; ,
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition related to a certain second reservation is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a stationary display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information;
Second identification information display control means for controlling so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means. When,
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped displayed, or after the winning judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player after the game is played;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variably displayed by the effect display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the second performance symbols on the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit. ,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first design for effect and the design for the second effect are changed. It is configured so that it can be displayed,
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first production pattern corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute variable display of production patterns,
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first production pattern corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second display corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute variable display of production patterns,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the final display mode corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the two production patterns,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the final display mode corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the two production patterns,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one presentation period,
With respect to the first effect symbols variably displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display mode can be displayed. When the display mode is displayed, it is possible to execute re-variation to be displayed in a variable manner again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the second It is configured so that a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the design for one effect can be displayed,
With respect to the second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain effect period,
In a predetermined situation before the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, a specific first performance symbol among a plurality of first performance symbol rows Said first effect symbol associated with a predetermined first effect symbol row different from said specific first effect symbol row out of said plurality of said first effect symbol rows than said first effect symbol row associated with said row While it is configured to be superimposed and displayed so that the front side is the front side, it is before the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period. In a specific situation after the predetermined situation, the first effect symbol related to the specific first effect symbol row is higher than the first effect symbol row related to the predetermined first effect symbol row While it is configured to be superimposed and displayed so that the front side is the front side, even in the predetermined situation or in the specific situation, the above-mentioned The second production pattern is configured so that it is not displayed overlapping each other,
It has a plurality of types of development effects which are effects to be executed after establishing a ready-to-win state, and has a plurality of types of after-reach effects that can occur after establishment of the ready-to-win state and before execution of the development effect,
The probability of displaying the specific display mode after the occurrence of the post-reach effect is configured to differ according to which of the plurality of types of the post-reach effect has occurred,
When the first effect pattern is displayed in the final display mode, an effect can be generated around the first effect pattern, while the second effect pattern is displayed in the final display mode. When it is done, it is configured so that the effect does not occur around the second production pattern,
When the final display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, the final display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed in each of the plurality of the first effect pattern rows, so that the plurality of the It is configured to display a combination of final display modes of the first performance symbols consisting of the first performance symbols,
When the final display mode of the second effect pattern is displayed, by displaying the final display mode of the second effect pattern in each of the plurality of the second effect pattern rows, the plurality of the It is configured to display a combination of final display modes of the second effect pattern consisting of the second effect pattern,
The plurality of first effect pattern rows and the plurality of second effect symbol rows are the same number of symbol rows,
The display mode of the second effect symbol immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. However, the display mode of the second effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display Regardless of the final display mode, after displaying a specific type of specified display mode among a plurality of types of specified display modes that are predetermined multiple types of display modes, a predetermined type different from the specified type of specified display mode It is configured to be switched to the specified display mode of
The number of types of the plurality of types of prescribed display modes is configured to be less than the number of types of final display modes of the first effect pattern,
The specific type of first effect symbol is configured to be able to be displayed with a special element indicating that it is highly advantageous to the player in a specific situation,
The first production pattern of a type different from the specific type of the first production pattern is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation,
Even if the second effect pattern is the same type as the first effect pattern of the specific type, the specific type of the first effect pattern is different from the specific type of the second effect pattern. Even if the second production pattern is of the same type as the first production pattern, it is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation,
The combination of the final display mode of the first design for effect and the combination of the final display mode of the second design for effect are, when the RAM clear process is executed, the first display mode before the RAM clear process is executed. Regardless of the display mode of the combination of the final display mode of the design for effect and the combination of the final display mode of the second design for effect, it is configured to be displayed in a predetermined display mode,
Having at least a specific display mode as the predetermined display mode related to the combination of the final display modes of the first effect symbols,
The first effect pattern is configured to be displayed in combination with a specific display element and a predetermined display element,
The specific display element in one of the plurality of first effect symbols constituting the specific display mode when the RAM clearing process is executed is defined as the first display element, and the RAM The specific display element in a given first effect symbol among the plurality of first effect symbols constituting the combination of the final display modes of the first effect symbols before the execution of the clear process is the second display element. When there are two display elements and the first display element and the second display element are the same type of the specific display element, the plurality of the display elements constituting the specific display mode when the RAM clear process is executed Said predetermined display element to be combined with said first display element in said first effect pattern among said first effect symbols, and final display of said first effect pattern before RAM clear processing is executed. The predetermined display element combined with the second display element in a certain first effect pattern among the plurality of first effect patterns constituting the combination of modes can be of different types. A pachinko machine characterized by:

Images